湘教版六年级上册英语教案(完整版)(五篇模版)

时间:2019-05-12 22:56:47下载本文作者:会员上传
简介:写写帮文库小编为你整理了多篇相关的《湘教版六年级上册英语教案(完整版)》,但愿对你工作学习有帮助,当然你在写写帮文库还可以找到更多《湘教版六年级上册英语教案(完整版)》。

第一篇:湘教版六年级上册英语教案(完整版)

Unit 1 What did you do during the holidays?(你在假期里做了什么?)

学情分析:

学生已掌握一定数量的动词和动词的现在分词,现在要学习过去式,并要将它们联系起来有一些困难。再加上新语法知识,它们会有畏难情绪。我们要巧妙的将新知识通过迁移,运用由旧带新的过度法,帮助学生在不知不觉中获得新知,提高语言交际能力。

课时安排

A, B

1课时

C, D

1课时 E, F

1课时

教学目标

语音功能

能正确运用过去时描述人物已经做过的事情。

语言结构

What did you do during the holidays?.词汇

掌握词汇:during,holiday,learn,practise,speak,sentence,teach; 理解词汇:during,holiday,learn,practise,speak,sentence,teach; 语法:

一般过去时

Period 1

一、教学目标

1、能听懂、会说新单词during,holiday,learn,practise,speak,sentence,teach;

2、能理解课文;能正确运用一般过去时描述人物已经做过的事情。

二、教学重点及难点

重点:掌握本单元四会单词。

难点:理解课文。

三、教学准备单词卡片和图片、教学挂图、教学磁带等。

四、教学步骤 Step 1 Warming up 1. 师生问候。

2. 唱已学的英文歌曲。Step 2 Presentation and drill 1. T: Hello, boys and girls.Nice to see you again!Today is the first day of this new term.I’m very happy.So let’s talk about the summer holidays together!

边说边将学生假期生活的图片贴在黑板上,布置成学生读书写字的场景。2.

可出示一张学生读书的图片。T: Look!What is Minging doing ? He is reading an English storybook.Mingming: I read many books during the holidays.板书单词holiday,带读。复数形式是 holidays。

3. 用同样的方法教单词during和learn。4.

出示一张写有一些相关动词的过去式的图片。T;板书单词write-wrote,learn-learnt, read-read, do-did帮助学生理解其含义。并带读。游戏--Look and say.(看看小说)教师做口型,学生根据

/ 37

口型说单词。游戏--Loud and low voice(大小声)教师大声说单词,学生小声重复;或者教师小声说,学生大声说。

Step 3 Fast reading and listening 1. 出示课文中人物的图片。T: Look!What did Mingming/Anne do during the holidays? Think it over.2. 快速阅读课文A部分,回答问题。T: Today we’ll learn Unit One.First let’s listen to the text, and then answer my question: 检查学生阅读情况,帮助学生回答所提问题。3. 听课文A部分录音,模仿其语音、语调,掌握新词难句的正确读音。Step 4 Intensive reading 1. 精读课文,然后两人一组完成课文E部分练习。2. 教师与学生校对答案后让学生按正确顺序读一遍。3. 听课文A部分录音,跟读。Step 5 Consolidation 1.黑板上的单词卡片及图片复述课文。2.练习。(见《练习册》P1~3)3.家庭作业:听磁带,读课文。

反思:

英国著名语言家c.e 埃克斯利说:“教英语的最好方法就是能引起学生学习英语兴趣的那种方法。”我们在单词教学中不能一味让学生死记硬背,而应尝试运用多种形式巧记,如采用儿歌、猜谜语、简笔画等形式。

Period 2 一.教学目标

1. 能复述课文A部分;

2. 能正确运用一般过去时描述人物已经做过的事情。

二.教学重点及难点 重点:理解现在进行时 难点:正确运用一般过去时描述人物已经做过的事情。

教学准备 让学生们准备一些生活照片、单词卡片、教学磁带等。四.教学步骤 Step 1 Warming up 1. 师生问候。

2. 唱已学的英语歌曲。

3. 利用卡片复习本单元新单词。游戏--Quick response(快速反应)教师说单词的中文,学生快速说出其英文;或者反过来,教师说英文,学生说中文。4. 复述课文。

1)两人一组进行复述

2)让一至两名学生上台复述。

/ 37

Step 2 Presentation and drill1. 学生自读课文一遍,将课文中一般过去时(如wrote,learnt, read, did等)划记出来。然后两人一组进行讨论。2. 教师总结。

Step 3 Practice(课文D部分)

1、出示课文D部分图片或做动作、表情等,人学生两人一组看图或动作说句子。

2、小组活动。

3、完成书面练习。

Step4 Consolidation1、创设情景,自由会话。

2、评价。

3、家庭作业:听磁带,读课文。

反思:学习单词的目的是为了运用词汇,并能正确运用到笔头表达之中。在英语教学中创设一定的语言情景,使学生宛如置于一种真实的语言环境中,就能使学生自然而然使用所学习词汇来表达他们的思想感情,从而达到学以致用的效果。

Period 3

一.教学目标

1、复习本单元单词、课文及语法知识;

2、能用英语谈论假期生活。

3、能独立完成课文E部分练习。二.教学重点及难点

重点: 能用英语谈论假期生活。难点:完成课文F部分练习。

三.教学准备 单词卡片、教学磁带等。四.教学步骤 Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、复习本单元已学新单词。

3、分小组活动(可进行说句子比赛等)。

Step 2 Presentation and drill(课文E部分)

1、听录音,跟读课文。

2、复习单词和词组

3、听录音,回答问题。

Step 3 Practice(课文F部分)

/ 37

1、教师解释题意。

2、让学生们说问句,找出答案。先口头练习,然后完成书面练习。Step4 Consolidation

1、创设情景,自由会话(要求运用一般过去时。如果有时间,可让学生自己创设情景,自由交换)。

2、评价。

3、练习

4、家庭作业:听磁带,读课文。

Unit 2 Katie always gets up early.(凯蒂一直都起得很早。)

学情分析:

学生已掌握运用一般过去时描述人物进行过的活动,现在要学习运用一般现在时描述经常发生的行为、活动以及理解第三人称单数做主语的一般现在时的用法,会有一些困难。老师要巧妙的将新知识通过迁移,运用由旧带新的过度法,帮助学生在不知不觉中获得新知,提高语言交际能力。

课时安排

A, B

1课时

C, D

1课时 E, F

1课时

教学目标

语音功能

能正确运用一般现在时描述经常发生的行为、活动等。语言结构

Katie always gets up early.词汇

掌握词汇:get up , have breakfast ,return, wave, play chess, dinner;理解词汇:always,often,sometimes,never 语法:

一般现在时

Period 1

一、教学目标

1、能听懂、会说新单词和短语get up , have breakfast ,return, wave, play chess, dinner;

2、能理解课文;

3、能正确运用一般现在时描述经常发生的行为、活动等。

二、教学重点及难点 重点:掌握本单元四会单词。难点:理解课文。

三、教学准备单词卡片和图片、教学挂图、教学磁带等。

四、教学步骤

Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、唱英文歌曲。

/ 37

3、复习已学的单词(during,holiday,learn,practise,speak,sentence,teach;)。Step 2 Presentation and drill

1、出示教学挂图。边说边做动作,让学生理解课文。然后,板书单词,带读,并利用单词卡片帮助学生理解其含义。

2、让学生看图说话。

Step 3 Fast reading and listening

1、速阅读课文A部分,回答问题。T: Today we’ll learn Unit 2.Katie always gets up early.First let’s listen to the text, and then answer my question: What time does Katie get up ? 检查学生阅读情况,帮助学生回答所提问题。

2、听课文A部分录音,模仿其语音、语调,掌握新词难句的正确读音。Step 4 Intensive reading

1、读课文,然后两人一组完成课文B部分 Let’s learn。

2、听课文A部分录音,跟读。Step 5 Consolidation 1.根据黑板上的单词卡片及图片试复述课文。

2.练习。(见《练习册》P5)3.家庭作业:听磁带,读课文。

反思: 在教单词时,要求教师自己示范到位,发音清晰,讲解发音要点,同时培养学生认真听、专心看、积极模仿的好习惯。听清后再跟着说。在确定学生大都听清、模仿正确后,再出示单词卡片,以免分散学生的注意力。对直观的单词配以图片、体态语帮助学生理解,顺利完成音——形——义的逐步过渡。

Period 2 一.教学目标

1、能读课文A部分;

2、能理解第三人称单数做主语的一般现在时的用法;

3、能运用一般现在时描述经常发生的行为、活动等。二.教学重点及难点

重点:理解第三人称单数做主语的一般现在时的用法

难点:运用一般现在时描述经常发生的行为、活动等。三.教学准备 单词卡片、教学磁带等。四.教学步骤

/ 37

Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、利用卡片复习本单元新单词。

3、试讲述自己的一天。

Step 2 Presentation and drill

1、出示单词卡片always often sometimes never

2、让学生们认读,纠正其发音。3、3、总结词义与区别。

Step 3 Practice(课文C D部分)

1、学生两人一组根据表格描述Peter的一天。

2、小组活动。

3、两人一组谈论各自的日常生活。

4、完成D部分书面练习。Step4 Consolidation

1、让学生们调查好朋友的妈妈每一天所做的事情,完成表格。

2、评价。

3、练习。

4、家庭作业:听磁带,读课文。反思:

单词是构成语言的三大要素之一。人类思维活动是借助词汇进行的,人类思想的交流也是通过由词构成的句子来实现的。没有词汇,任何语言都是不可想象的。因此单词具有语言的意义,应在特定的语境中引出,这样既便于学生理解,印象也深刻。

Period 3

一.教学目标

1、复习本单元单词、课文及语法知识;

2、能独立完成课文E部分练习。

3、能独立完成课文F部分练习。二.教学重点及难点

重点:区别副词always,often,usually,sometimes,never的含义及用法。

/ 37

难点:课文F部分练习。三.教学准备

单词卡片、教学挂图、教学磁带等。

四.教学步骤 Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、可分小组说句子比赛。Step 2 Presentation and dril l(课文E部分)完成E部分练习。Step 3 Practice(课文F部分)

1、Let’s rhyme.2、完成书面练习。Step4 Consolidation

1、让学生模仿课本中的表格设计一份调查表。内容自定,然后陈述其调查结果。

2、评价。

3、完成练习

4、家庭作业:听磁带,读课文。

Unit 3 I like my computer

学情分析:

学生已掌握运用一般过去时描述人物进行过的活动,和运用一般现在时描述经常发生的行为、活动以及理解第三人称单数做主语的一般现在时动词的用法,本单元学习情态动词can的用法,了解电脑的功能,可能会有一些困难。老师要巧妙的将新知识通过迁移,运用由旧带新的过度法,帮助学生在不知不觉中获得新知,提高语言交际能力。

课时安排

A, B

1课时

C, D

1课时 E, F

1课时

教学目标

语音功能

能理解并掌握情态动词can的用法。

/ 37

语言结构

I like my computer.What can we do on the computers?

词汇

掌握词汇:email, find out about , send, search for,world, present,greeting,interesting 理解词汇:find out about search for on the computer 语法:

情态动词can的用法

Period 1

教学目标

1、能听懂、会说新单词和短语

email my friends , send greetings , in the world , search for a lot of things , find out about countris

2、能理解并复述课文;

3、能理解并掌握情态动词can的用法。

教学重点难点

重点:掌握本单元四会单词。理解并复述课文。难点:理解can的用法

教学准备 Word cards, Type CAI,Drawing Instrument

Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、唱英语歌曲

3、复习

What ’s this ? What’s that ?

复习周边的物体,同时老师说 We can ….with it.Step 2 Presentation and drill

1、师指着自己的电脑问 What ’s this ?

Do you have a computer?

Do you like your computer? What can we do with it?

2、CAI利用图片,帮助学生理解。拼读单词并帮助学生理解其含义。

email my friends , send greetings , in the world , search for a lot of things , do his homework

find out about countries learn drawing and painting , play computer games ,先开火车强化训练读音,再放到句子中操练.3、让学生们根据CAI图片, 简单地描述电脑的功能, 理解并学会用can。

Step 3 Practice

/ 37

1、自由读 齐读 分组读, 生生活动, 师生互动

Play games 单词游戏:

Guessing games.2、Pairwork CAI集中图片,学生练习说话 What can we do on the computers?

3、听课文A部分录音,模仿其主意、语调,掌握新词难句的正确读音。

Answer: What did Peter see yesterday ? Step 4 Intensive reading

1、精读课文,判断正误。答案:

1)Peter’s father bought him a computer for New Year.2)Peter was very happy.3)Peter’s computer is very fast.4)Peter saw an interesting bird on the computer yesterday.5)We can search for a lot of things.6)We can find out about countries in the world.2、听课文A部分录音,跟读。

Step 5 Consolidation

1、根据黑板上的单词及图片复述课文。

2、评价。

3、练习。

4、家庭作业。听磁带,背课文。

教学反思:单词是构成语言的三大要素之一。人类思维活动是借助词汇进行的,人类思想的交流也是通过由词构成的句子来实现的。没有词汇,任何语言都是不可想象的。因此单词具有语言的意义,应在特定的语境中引出,这样既便于学生理解,印象也深刻。

Period 2

教学目标

1、复习并巩固新单词和短语

email my friends , send greetings , in the world , search for a lot of things , find out about countris

2、能理解并复述课文;

3、巩固情态动词can的用法。

教学重点难点

重点:掌握本单元四会单词。理解并复述课文。难点:运用can

教学准备Word cards, Type,CAI, Drawing Instrument

教学过程设计和安排

Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、唱英语歌曲

3、复习

/ 37

email my friends , send greetings , in the world , search for a lot of things , do his homework

find out about countries

learn drawing and painting , play computer games ,Step 2 Presentation and drill

1、师指着自己的电脑问

What can we do with it?

CAI利用图片,帮助学生理解, 巩固并运用单词并帮助学生理解其含义。

2、让学生们根据CAI图片, 简单描述电脑的功能, 理解并学会用can。

Step 3 Practice

1、P10 Part C Ask and answer in pairs.2、Pairwork

CAI集中图片,学生练习说话What can we do on the computers? Step 4 Let’s read

1、精读课文,判断正误。

1)Dongdong was very sad.2)Dongdong’s father bought him a computer as his present.3)He has a friend in Australia.4)He could email his friends and do his homework.5)Dongdong couldn’t draw, but Peter could.6)Dongdong could search for a lot of things on the computer.2、听课文D部分录音,跟读。

3、完成习题 Fill in the blanks.Step 5 Consolidation

1、根据黑板上的单词及图片复述课文。

2、评价。

3、练习。

4、家庭作业。听磁带,背课文。

教学反思:我们在教学中应将传统教学手段与现代教学手段有效结合起来,按照新《课标》的要求,在教学思路和方法上求实、求新、求变;同时注意学生在学习方法上的突破,养成良好的学习习惯和形成有效的学习策略,培养自主学习的能力以及观察、记忆、思维、想象能力和创新精神,拓展视野,为他们的终身学习和发展打下良好的基础。

Period 3

教学目标

1、复习并熟练运用新单词和短语

email my friends , send greetings , in the world , search for , find out about countries

2、灵活运用情态动词can。

教学重点难点

重点:掌握本单元四会单词。难点:can could的用法

教学准备Word cards, Type,CAI, Drawing Instrument

教学过程设计和安排

Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、唱英语歌曲

3、复习

/ 37

email my friends , send greetings , in the world , search for a lot of things , find out about countries do his homework

learn drawing and painting , play computer games ,Step 2 Presentation and drill

1、学生谈论What can we do with the computer? CAI利用图片,巩固并熟练运用单词。

2、让学生们根据CAI图片, 简单描述电脑的功能, 理解并学会用can。

Step 3 Practice

1、P10 Part C Ask and answer in pairs.2、Pairwork CAI集中图片学生练习说话What can we do on the computers? Step 4 Listen and read

Read aloud Part D

excited, bought him a computer, birthday present , email his friends , do his homework, wanted to learn , learn drawing and painting, show him , how to search for a lot of things, showed Dongdong some computer games, It isn’t good for your eyes.Step 5 Let’s write P12 PartE

Fill in the blanks P12

Let’s have fun.Let’s rhyme

Step 6 Consolidation

1、背诵Part A。

2、评价。

3、练习。

4、家庭作业。听磁带,背课文。

教学反思:

我们在教学中应将传统教学手段与现代教学手段有效结合起来,按照新《课标》的要求,在教学思路和方法上求实、求新、求变;同时注意学生在学习方法上的突破,养成良好的学习习惯和形成有效的学习策略,培养自主学习的能力以及观察、记忆、思维、想象能力和创新精神,拓展视野,为他们的终身学习和发展打下良好的基础。

Unit four: It’s the Mid-Autumn Festival.学情分析:

学生已掌握运用一般过去时描述人物进行过的活动,和运用一般现在时描述经常发生的行为、活动以及理解第三人称单数做主语的一般现在时动词的用法,本单元学一些关于中秋佳节的知识,能通过中国中秋佳节的,可能会有一些困难。老师要巧妙的将新知识通过迁移,运用由旧带新的过度法,帮助学生在不知不觉中获得新知,提高语言交际能力。

课时安排

A, B

1课时

C, D

1课时 E, F

1课时

/ 37

教学目标

语音功能

谈论中秋节的传统美食。

语言结构

The Mid-Autumn Festival is coming

词汇

掌握词汇:the mid-autumn festival, centre,mooncake, nuts 理解词汇:bright,even ,poem 语法:

enjy doing

Period 1

教学目标

1、复习并熟练运用新单词和短语

mooncake nuts seed nearby type taste

2、能够了解enjoy doing 的用法,能用“which type do you like?”询问他人对月饼的喜好级应用,并用I like the one with …..”作出回答

教学重点难点

重点:能够听懂,会说,认读新的单词 Mid-Autumn,moocake ,nuts 等单词。

难点:运用旧知识,如对“how much ….?” “which one do you like?”等句型做出回答

教学准备:用于教授单词的卡片,图片,多媒体课件等

教学过程设计和安排

Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、唱英语歌曲

3、复习(教师合理安排教学进度,根据实际情况询问如:boys and girls ,what date is today ?等问题来引出学生的兴趣,提高学生的注意力)

4、教师用课件来引出即将到来,或者已经过去的中秋节

Step 2 Presentation and drill

New words and new sentences

1、教师用课件或者单词卡片出事单词短语或句子:today

English class, the mid-autumn festivel ,让学生思考,用以上单词想出不同的句子。

2、教师快速的用课件或者卡片出示 moon tea

fruit family mooncake 等让学生快速抢答,从而巩固得到新的单词。3 第一步:listen and answer

不打开书,只听,在听前布置任务 第二步:listen and find 不打开书,听第二遍 第三步;read and find

打开书,画出原文中Mrs li问的两个问题,并检查刚刚听到的是否正确 第四步:read and answer 第五步:read and repeat

Step 3 Practice

/ 37

1、情景创设:在中秋节表演用英语与妈妈一起去商场买月饼去看爷爷奶奶。

背诵Part A。

3、评价。

4、练习。

5、家庭作业。听磁带,背课文。

教学反思:

在教学中我们应提倡“新旧贯通”或叫“相互迁移”。其实这也是一个很好的学习方法。

Period 2

教学目标

1、复习并巩固新单词和短语

mooncake nuts seed nearby type taste等

2、能用 I enjoy …”表达自己的喜好

3、能理解,运用“enjoy doing….”

教学重点难点

重点:理解运用 “I enjoy ….”能学会运用阅读技巧scanning进行阅读。

难点:能在实际生活中运用到enjoy来谈论自己的喜好,注意到enjoy后面的doing这一动词形式。

教学准备Word cards, Type,CAI, Drawing Instrument

教学过程设计和安排

Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、唱英语歌曲

3、复习mooncake nuts seed nearby type taste等 1)游戏操练:接龙。教师出示有关本课的图片,进行句子操练,看哪一组的句子多,如:A moocake , A round moocake。

2)让学生们根据CAI图片, 让同学们运用句型“enjoy doing…”造句。

Step 3 Practice

1、P10 Part C Ask and answer in pairs.2、几人一组,把D部分改编成对话表演。Step 4 Consolidation

1、根据黑板上的单词及图片复述课文。

2、评价。

3、练习。

4、家庭作业。听磁带,背课文。

教学反思:

Period 3

/ 37

教学目标

1、复习并进一步巩固新单词和短语Mooncake nuts seed nearby type taste等

2、能够灵活运用 “enjoy doing…..”表达自己的喜好

3、能够理解嫦娥奔月的故事;能理解E部分的短文并回答问题。

教学重点难点

重点:掌握本单元四会单词。

难点:理解嫦娥奔月的故事,并回答问题。

教学准备Word cards, Type,CAI, Drawing Instrument

教学过程设计和安排

Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、唱英语歌曲

3、复习

1、Mooncake nuts seed nearby type taste等

Step 2 Presentation and drill

1、用不同的单词描绘中秋节将本课关键词汇加入其中,让同学们猜猜这是什么节日。

2、阅读文章《嫦娥奔月》。

Step 3 Practice

1、英语诗歌欣赏《The moon》.2、汉语诗歌欣赏《水调歌头》 Step 4 Consolidation

2、背诵Part A。

2、评价。

3、练习。

4、家庭作业。听磁带,背课文。教学反思:

Unit 5 It will be sunny and cool tomorrow

学情分析:

学生已掌握运用一般过去时描述人物进行过的活动,和运用一般现在时描述经常发生的行为、活动以及理解第三人称单数做主语的一般现在时动词的用法,本单元学一些关于天气的词汇和一般将来时“I will..”的用法,可能会有一些困难。老师要巧妙的将新知识通过迁移,运用由旧带新的过度法,帮助学生在不知不觉中获得新知,提高语言交际能力。

课时安排

A, B

1课时

C, D

1课时 E, F

1课时

教学目标

/ 37

语音功能

谈论将来的天气。

语言结构

it will be sunny and cool tomorrow

词汇

掌握词汇:safe clear heavy light rain storm won’t 理解词汇:safe storm won’t 语法:

will/won’t 表将来

Period 1

教学目标

1、复习并熟练运用新单词和短语

safe clear heavy light rain storm won’t

3、能够了解it will/won’t be …tomorrow 的用法,并用其描述不同的天气;能理解、运用句型“there will/won’t be a..”进一步描述不同的天气

4、能用英文指认将来不同的天气,能向同伴介绍将来的天气,能听懂,会说A部分的天气预报

5、教学重点难点

重点:能够听懂,会说,认读新的safe clear heavy light rain storm won’t 等单词。难点:能运用名词rain wind

snow 等以及他们相对应的形容词rainy windy snowy等

教学准备:用于教授单词的卡片,图片,多媒体课件等

教学过程设计和安排

Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、唱英语歌曲

3、复习

Step 2 Presentation and drill

New words and new sentences

1、教师用课件或者单词卡片出事单词短语或句子帮助同学们复习已学过的单词sunny rainy windy cold 等或者提供不同的图片让学生自由发挥

2、教师快速的用课件或者卡片出示不同天气的图片 等让学生快速抢答,从而巩固得到新的单词。

Step 3 Practice

1、情景创设:教师结合实际,为学生创立秋游的情景,在情境中合理的学习操练新单词weather forecast clear heavy light 等

3、评价。

4、练习。

5、家庭作业。听磁带,背课文。

教学反思:在教学中我们应提倡“新旧贯通”或叫“相互迁移”。其实这也是一个很好的学习方法。

单词是构成语言的三大要素之一。人类思维活动是借助词汇进行的,人类思想的交流也是通过由词构成的句子来实现的。没有词汇,任何语言都是不可想象的。因此单词具有语言的意义,应在特定的语境中引出,这样既便于学生理解,印象也深刻。

/ 37

Period 2

教学目标

1、复习并巩固新单词和短语

weather forecast clear heavy light等

2、能用 “it will/won’t be …”描述明天的天气

3、能理解,“will/won’t”表示将来的含义,能理解 it will be 和 there will be a … 中be的用法

4、能描述明天的天气,能理解课文D部分的短文

教学重点难点

重点:在语境中运用新的句型“I will/won’t be ….”与 “there will /won’t be a …”描述将来的天气;能运用合适的阅读技巧进行阅读。

难点:对名词rain wind

snow 等以及他们相对应的形容词的正确应用

教学准备Word cards, Type,CAI, Drawing Instrument

教学过程设计和安排

Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、唱英语歌曲

3、复习weather forecast clear heavy ligh等

Step 2 presentation

1、情景创设为十一黄金周设计合理的天气,并且讨论国庆出游的计划,然后交流

2、游戏操练:接龙。教师出示有关本课的图片,进行句子操练,看哪一组的句子多。

3、让学生们根据CAI图片, 让同学们运用句型造句。Step 3 practice

游戏操练,天气预报员,教师出示听力原文学生扮演天气预报员

Step 4 Consolidation

1、根据黑板上的单词及图片复述课文。

2、评价。

3、练习。

4、家庭作业。听磁带,背课文。教学反思:

每次备课时,我都细心研究教材、考虑学生的分层和知识差异,穿插一些生动有趣的游戏活动以及有关中西方文化差异的故事。通过这些活动,增强了学生的英语学习热情和兴趣。而且,我经常有意识地给学生创设说英语的环境,与同学们相遇时,尽可能用英语问候;当学生来办公室请教问题时,也总是要求他们用英语提问,课堂上也尽量要求他们用英语提问。总之,通过一系列的手段让学生体会到学、用英语的乐趣,养成使用英语的良好习惯和意识。

Period 3

教学目标

1、复习并进一步巩固新单词和短语weather forecast clear heavy ligh等

2、能够灵活运用 “I will/won’t be …”表达明天的天气

3、能够运用所学的有关天气的单词和句型构建篇章。

教学重点难点

重点:掌握本单元四会单词。

/ 37

难点:学唱Itsy bitsy spider ; 能运用天气单词向他人介绍将来的天气。

教学准备Word cards, Type,CAI, Drawing Instrument

教学过程设计和安排

Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、唱英语歌曲

3、复习weather forecast clear heavy lighe等

Step 2 Presentation and drill

1、教师与同学谈谈你去过的城市,并且谈谈你去的时候那边的天气情况。

2、教师述说去过的地方,并运用图片引导同学们讲出当时的天气情况。

Step 3 Practice

教师利用视频向同学们出示全球极端天气预温室效应的情况,看完后师生谈谈自己的感受,并表达人类今后该怎样保护大自然

Step 4 Consolidation

1、背诵Part A。

2、评价。

3、练习。

4、家庭作业。听磁带,背课文。

教学反思:单词是构成语言的三大要素之一。人类思维活动是借助词汇进行的,人类思想的交流也是通过由词构成的句子来实现的。没有词汇,任何语言都是不可想象的。因此单词具有语言的意义,应在特定的语境中引出,这样既便于学生理解,印象也深刻。

Unit 6 I will bring a big bottle of orange juice

学情分析:

学生已掌握运用一般过去时描述人物进行过的活动,和运用一般现在时描述经常发生的行为、活动以及理解第三人称单数做主语的一般现在时动词的用法,本单元学一些关于食物的词汇,在这样的词汇中我们将学习到可数不可数名词的表示数量的区别,可能会有一些困难。老师要巧妙的将新知识通过迁移,运用由旧带新的过度法,帮助学生在不知不觉中获得新知,提高语言交际能力。

课时安排

A, B

1课时

C, D

1课时

/ 37

E, F

1课时

教学目标

语音功能: 谈论不同数量的食物。

语言结构: I will bring a big bottle of orange juice 词汇

掌握词汇 : bar bottle candy fruit picnic 理解词汇:can cookie radio pea bar bottle candy fruit picnic nut volleyball 语法: 可数名词和不可数名词数量的表示方法

Period 1

教学目标

1、复习并熟练运用新单词和短语

2、bar bottle candy fruit picnic

3、能了解学会描述可数不可数名词的数量,同时理解,掌握a bottle of orange juice ,a few cans of

Coke,等短语

教学重点难点

重点:能够听懂,会说,认读新的can cookie radio pea bar bottle candy fruit picnic nut volleyball 等单词。

难点:区分可数不可数名词;能理解并描述不同名词的数量

教学准备:用于教授单词的卡片,图片,多媒体课件等

教学过程设计和安排

Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、唱英语歌曲

3、复习

学习操练新的知识:a box of cakes a bottle of orange juice ,a few cans of Coke,等短语

分析上一单元学习过的知识像mooncake如果用英语要怎么来描述一盒月饼呢?这样来引入这一单元所学习的问题

Step 2 Presentation and drill

New words and new sentences

1、教师用课件或者单词卡片出事单词短语或句子帮助同学们复习已学过的单词can cookie radio pea bar bottle candy fruit picnic nut volleyball 等或者提供不同的图片让学生自由发挥

2、教师快速的用课件或者卡片出示不同食物的图片 等让学生快速抢答,从而巩固得到新的单词。

Step 3 Practice

1、情景创设:教师结合实际,为学生创立秋游的情景,在情境中合理的学习操练新单词can cookie radio pea bar bottle candy fruit picnic nut volleyball 等

2、评价。

3、练习。

4、家庭作业。听磁带,背课文。

教学反思:

/ 37

Period 2

教学目标

1、复习并巩固新单词和短语

can cookie radio pea bar bottle candy fruit picnic nut volleyball等

2、能用 “it will bring …”描述明天的天气

3、能熟练的描述不可数名词的数量

4、进一步的巩固,学会描述不可数名词的数量

教学重点难点

重点:在语境中运用新的句型“I will bring ….”,学会描述不可数名词Coke ,chocolate等的数量;能运用合适的阅读技巧进行阅读。

难点:描述不可数名词Coke ,chocolate等的数量

教学准备Word cards, Type,CAI, Drawing Instrument

教学过程设计和安排

Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、唱英语歌曲

3、复习can cookie radio pea bar bottle candy fruit picnic nut volleyball等

Step 2 presentation

4、情景创设讨论国庆出游的计划,然后交流,我们在国庆出游的那天带上一些什么样的食物呢?让同学们用英语来描述自己所带的食物和数量

5、游戏操练:接龙。教师出示有关本课的图片,进行句子操练,看哪一组的句子多。

6、让学生们根据CAI图片, 让同学们运用句型造句。Step 4 Consolidation

1、根据黑板上的单词及图片复述课文。

2、评价。

3、练习。

4、家庭作业。听磁带,背课文。

教学反思:我还组织了英语兴趣小组,采取互帮互助的活动形式,培养他们对英语的浓厚兴趣。另外,英语课本剧的排练也是一个很好的兴趣培养方法,同学们通过排练,增强了对英语学习的浓厚兴趣。

Period 3

教学目标

1、复习并进一步巩固新单词和短语can cookie radio pea bar bottle candy fruit picnic nut volleyball等

2、能够灵活运用 “I will bring ….”并陈述旅游时带东西的计划。

教学重点难点

重点:掌握本单元四会单词。难点:描述不可数名词的数量

教学准备Word cards, Type,CAI, Drawing Instrument

/ 37

教学过程设计和安排

Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、唱英语歌曲

3、复习can cookie radio pea bar bottle candy fruit picnic nut volleyball等

Step 2 Presentation and drill

1、出示一张照片向同学们谈论照片中的人物

2、学生交流、谈论自己家庭的野餐的计划,说出携带食物的数量

Step 3 Practice

1教师利用PPT出示一张野餐图图中有大量的食物,让同学们描述图上的食物 Step 4 Consolidation

6、背诵Part A。

2、评价。

3、练习。

4、家庭作业。听磁带,背课文。

教学反思:

在总结一节课、一篇材料的阅读情况时,在学生概括、总结的基础上,教师要及时进行补充,以进一步进行提炼和归纳,从而使总结更加完整、准确。

Unit 7 What can I do?

学情分析:

学生已掌握运用一般过去时描述人物进行过的活动,和运用一般现在时描述经常发生的行为、活动以及理解第三人称单数做主语的一般现在时动词的用法,本单元话题为提供帮助,在教学中老师要巧妙的将新知识通过迁移,创设多种情境,像志愿者这一类可以为人们提供帮助的一些工作,提高学生的爱心和对社会的关注。更能加强学生对于学习的兴趣。课时安排

A, B

1课时

C, D

1课时 E, F

1课时

教学目标

语音功能: 谈论自己会帮助他人做的事情 语言结构: What can I do? 词汇

掌握词汇: slow weak

/ 37

理解词汇:himself free

Ms 语法:sb.can do sth.Period 1

教学目标

1、复习并熟练运用新单词和短语

2、himself free

Ms等

3、能交流可以做那些力所能及的事来关爱老人

4、能用I can …谈论自己会做那些事

5、会说A部分内容

教学重点难点

重点:能够听懂,会说,认读新的himself, free , Ms , an old woman,help the old people on the road等单词或者短语。

难点:能正确理解“we can help them to clean their homes”和 “I can ask mum to make cakes for them.”两个句子

教学准备:用于教授单词的卡片,图片,多媒体课件等

教学过程设计和安排

Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、唱英语歌曲

3、复习

学习操练新的知识:himself, free , Ms , an old woman,help the old people on the road,等短语

教师用课件快速出示一些家务的图片,学生快速说出学过的词组 教师一边展示句型条“what can you do at..”一边询问学生你能在家或者学校做点什么事情。学生根据实际情况回答。

Step 2 Presentation and drill

New words and new sentences

1、教师用课件或者单词卡片出事单词短语或句子帮助同学们复习已学过的单词himself, free , Ms , an old woman,help the old people on the road 等或者提供不同的图片让学生自由发挥

Step 3 Practice

1、教师分步骤循序渐进的引导学生们熟悉课文

3、评价。

4、练习。

5、家庭作业。听磁带,背课文。

教学反思:

单词是构成语言的三大要素之一。人类思维活动是借助词汇进行的,人类思想的交流也是通过由词构成的句子来实现的。没有词汇,任何语言都是不可想象的。因此单词具有语言的意义,应在特定的语境中引出,这样既便于学生理解,印象也深刻。

Period 2

/ 37

教学目标

1、复习并巩固新单词和短语

himself, free , Ms , an old woman,help the old people on the road等

2、能用 “I can help them …/I can ….”讲述自己能为他人提供的帮助

3、能能阅读理解D部分课文的内容

4、能根据课文回答问题

教学重点难点

重点:在语境中运用新的句型“I can ….”,讲述自己能为他人提供的帮助;能运用合适的阅读技巧进行阅读。

难点:能运用 “help sb.(to)do sth.”的表达方式

教学准备Word cards, Type,CAI, Drawing Instrument

教学过程设计和安排

Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、唱英语歌曲

3、复习himself, free , Ms , an old woman,help the old people on the road等

1)游戏操练:接龙。教师出示有关本课的图片,进行句子操练,看哪一组的句子多。2)让学生们根据CAI图片, 让同学们运用句型造句。

Step 2 presentation

1、以课文C进行分角色扮演

Step3 分组进行游戏,每组将老师的句子读给后面的同学看谁能快点完成Step 4 Consolidation

1、根据黑板上的单词及图片复述课文。

2、评价。

3、练习。

4、家庭作业。听磁带,背课文。

教学反思:

Period 3

教学目标

1、复习并进一步巩固新单词和短语himself, free , Ms , an old woman,help the old people on the road等

2、能够灵活运用 “I can ….”并陈述可以为老人做些什么。

教学重点难点

重点:掌握本单元四会单词。难点:根据E部分完成句子

教学准备Word cards, Type,CAI, Drawing Instrument

教学过程设计和安排

Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、唱英语歌曲

/ 37

3、复习himself, free , Ms , an old woman,help the old people on the road等

Step 2 Presentation and drill

1、询问同学在家一般为父母做一些怎样的家务

2、情景对话。

Step 3 Practice

教师准备一些家务的图片,由第一个有同学看让后做出动作让下一个同学回答

Step 4 Consolidation

1、背诵Part A。

2、评价。

3、练习。

4、家庭作业。听磁带,背课文。

教学反思:英国著名语言家c.e 埃克斯利说:“教英语的最好方法就是能引起学生学习英语兴趣的那种方法。”我们在单词教学中不能一味让学生死记硬背,而应尝试运用多种形式巧记,如采用儿歌、猜谜语、简笔画等形式。

Unit 8 we shouldn’t waste water

学情分析:

学生已掌握运用一般过去时描述人物进行过的活动,和运用一般现在时描述经常发生的行为、活动以及理解第三人称单数做主语的一般现在时动词的用法,本单元话题为环境保护,教师可以创立多种情景、像关于环境保护的宣传海报等活动,创立多种对话情景。不仅能加强孩子们对于环境保护的重视,更能加强学生对于学习的兴趣。课时安排

A, B

1课时

C, D

1课时 E, F

1课时

教学目标

语音功能: 讨论环境保护该做什么和不该做什么 语言结构: we shouldn’t waste water 词汇

掌握词汇 :swaste blouse enough world save drop 理解词汇:exercise indtead wild should 语法:should/shouldn’t do something..23 / 37

Period 1

教学目标

1、复习并熟练运用新单词和短语

2、:swaste blouse enough world save drop exercise indtead wild should等

3、说出环保的几种方式

4、了解破坏环境的行为

5、会说A部分内容

教学重点难点

重点:能够听懂,会说,认读新的:swaste blouse enough world save drop exercise indtead wild should等单词或者短语。难点:能正确理解记忆B部分词组

教学准备:用于教授单词的卡片,图片,多媒体课件等

教学过程设计和安排

Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、唱英语歌曲

3、复习

学习操练新的知识:swaste blouse enough world save drop exercise indtead wild should等

教师用课件出示美丽的风景图,让同学感受到大自然的美丽

教师一边展示句型条“should/shouldn’t do something..”一边询问学生你能保护大自然做点什么事情。学生根据实际情况回答。

Step 2 Presentation and drill

New words and new sentences

1、教师用课件或者单词卡片出事单词短语或句子帮助同学们复习已学过的单词swaste blouse enough world save drop exercise indtead wild should等 等或者提供不同的图片让学生自由发挥

Step 3 Practice

1、教师分步骤循序渐进的引导学生们熟悉课文

2、评价。

3、练习。

4、家庭作业。听磁带,背课文。

教学反思:

Period 2

教学目标

1、复习并巩固新单词和短语waste blouse enough world save drop exercise wild should等

2、能用 “I should/shouldn’t do something.”讲述自己能为大自然提供的帮助

3、能能阅读理解D部分课文的内容

/ 37

4、能根据课文回答问题

教学重点难点

重点:在语境中运用新的句型“should/shouldn’t do something..”,讲述自己能为大自然提供的帮助;能运用合适的阅读技巧进行阅读。

难点:能运用 should/shouldn’t do something.的表达方式

教学准备Word cards, Type,CAI, Drawing Instrument

教学过程设计和安排

Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、唱英语歌曲

3、复习waste blouse enough world save drop exercise instead wild should等

1)游戏操练:接龙。教师出示有关本课的图片,进行句子操练,看哪一组的句子多。2)让学生们根据CAI图片, 让同学们运用句型造句。

Step 2 presentation

1、围绕world 一词来展开联想,说出所想的事物

2、围绕I should/shouldn’t do something这一句型来说说我们为大自然做的事 Step3 分组进行游戏,每组将老师的句子读给后面的同学看谁能快点完成Step 4 Consolidation

1、根据黑板上的单词及图片复述课文。

2、评价。

3、练习。

4、家庭作业。听磁带,背课文。

教学反思:

Period 3 教学目标

1、复习并进一步巩固新单词和短语waste blouse enough world save drop exercise instead wild should等

2、能够灵活运用 “I should/shouldn’t do something”并陈述可以为大自然做些什么。

教学重点难点

重点:掌握本单元四会单词。难点:根据E部分完成句子

教学准备Word cards, Type,CAI,Drawing Instrument

教学过程设计和安排

Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、唱英语歌曲

3、复习himself, free , Ms , an old woman,help the old people on the road等

Step 2 Presentation and drill

询问同学在家一般为大自然做一些怎样的事情

/ 37

Step 3 Practice

教师准备一些保护大自然的图片,由第一个有同学看让后做出动作让下一个同学回答

Step 4 Consolidation

1、背诵Part A。

2、评价。

3、练习。

4、家庭作业。听磁带,背课文。

教学反思:

Unit 9 This bird is bigger than the first one

学情分析:

学生已掌握运用一般过去时描述人物进行过的活动,和运用一般现在时描述经常发生的行为、活动以及理解第三人称单数做主语的一般现在时动词的用法,本单元话题事物的比较级,创立多种对话情景。不仅能加强孩子们对于世界的观察,更能加强学生对于学习的兴趣。课时安排

A, B

1课时

C, D

1课时 E, F

1课时

教学目标

语音功能: 比较事物的特征

语言结构: this bird is bigger than the first one 词汇

掌握词汇 than clay bigger taller longest 理解词汇:decide

loud

语法:形容词的比较级和最高级

Period 1

教学目标

1、复习并熟练运用新单词和短语

2、than clay bigger taller longest decide

loud等

3、能用A is(比较级)than B 和…is the(最高级)

4、观察比较实物的大小

5、会说A部分内容

教学重点难点

/ 37

重点:能够听懂,会说,认读新的than clay bigger taller longest decide loud等

单词或者短语。

难点:能正确理解记忆B部分词组

教学准备:用于教授单词的卡片,图片,多媒体课件等

教学过程设计和安排

Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、唱英语歌曲

3、复习

学习操练新的知识: than clay bigger taller longest decide loud等 教师用课件出不同大小的动物或者物品比较大小高矮

教师一边展示句型条“A is(比较级)than B 和…is the(最高级)”一边询问学生这样的物品大小是怎样的。学生根据实际情况回答。

Step 2 Presentation and drill

New words and new sentences

教师用课件或者单词卡片出事单词短语或句子帮助同学们复习已学过的单词than clay bigger taller longest decide loud等或者提供不同的图片让学生自由发挥

Step 3 Practice

1、教师分步骤循序渐进的引导学生们熟悉课文

2、评价。

3、练习。

4、家庭作业。听磁带,背课文。

教学反思:英国著名语言家c.e 埃克斯利说:“教英语的最好方法就是能引起学生学习英语兴趣的那种方法。”我们在单词教学中不能一味让学生死记硬背,而应尝试运用多种形式巧记,如采用儿歌、猜谜语、简笔画等形式。

Period 2

教学目标

1、复习并巩固新单词和短语

than clay bigger taller longest decide loud等

2、能用 “A is(比较级)than B 和…is the(最高级).”来比较事物的大小

3、能能阅读理解D部分课文的内容

4、能根据课文回答问题

教学重点难点

重点:在语境中运用新的句型能用 “A is(比较级)than B 和…is the(最高级).”来比较事物的大小;能运用合适的阅读技巧进行阅读。难点能用 “A is(比较级)than B 和…is the(最高级).”来比较事物的大小 教学准备Word cards, Type,CAI, Drawing Instrument

教学过程设计和安排

Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

/ 37

2、唱英语歌曲

3、复习than clay bigger taller longest decide loud等

Step 2 presentation

1)游戏操练:接龙。教师出示有关本课的图片,进行句子操练,看哪一组的句子多。2)让学生们根据CAI图片, 让同学们运用句型造句。

3)用 “A is(比较级)than B 和…is the(最高级).”来比较事物的大小

Step3 分组进行游戏,每组将老师的句子读给后面的同学看谁能快点完成 Step 4 Consolidation

1、根据黑板上的单词及图片复述课文。

2、评价。

3、练习。

4、家庭作业。听磁带,背课文。

教学反思:

Period 3

教学目标

1、复习并进一步巩固新单词和短语than clay bigger taller longest decide loud等

2、能够灵活运用“A is(比较级)than B 和…is the(最高级).”来比较事物的大小。

教学重点难点

重点:掌握本单元四会单词。难点:根据E部分完成句子

教学准备Word cards, Type,CAI, Drawing Instrument

教学过程设计和安排

Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、唱英语歌曲

3、复习than clay bigger taller longest decide loud等,Step 2 Presentation and drill

观看一些体育明星的视频,来比较他们谁更高,更瘦等

Step 3 Practice

学生进行一次比赛,然后由同学进行比较

Step 4 Consolidation

1、背诵Part A。

2、评价。

/ 37

3、练习。

4、家庭作业。听磁带,背课文。教学反思:

Unit 10 I don’t feel well today

学情分析:

学生已掌握运用一般过去时描述人物进行过的活动,和运用一般现在时描述经常发生的行为、活动以及理解第三人称单数做主语的一般现在时动词的用法,本单元话题为谈论身体健康状况,让同学们保证有一个健康强壮的体魄。创立多种对话情景。不仅更能加强学生对于学习的兴趣,更能能加强孩子们对于健康的认知。课时安排

A, B

1课时

C, D

1课时 E, F

1课时

教学目标

语音功能: 能用本课学到的知识对于身体的情况进行交谈 语言结构: I don’t feel well today 词汇

掌握词汇 don’t feel well;have a headache;have a fever ,take medicine 理解词汇:enjoy themselves;invite;ill;ceck 语法:祈使句 have a rest.Drink some water

Period 1

教学目标

1、复习并熟练运用新单词和短语

2、don’t feel well;have a headache;have a fever;take medicin;enjoy themselves;invite;ill;ceck 等

3、能用 “what’s wrong with you”向他人表示关切的问候

4、能用 “I have…”进行回答

5、会说A部分内容

教学重点难点

重点:能够听懂,会说,认读新的don’t feel well;have a headache;have a fever;take medicin;enjoy themselves;invite;ill;ceck 等等 单词或者短语。

难点:能正确理解记忆B部分词组

教学准备:用于教授单词的卡片,图片,多媒体课件等

教学过程设计和安排

/ 37

Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、唱英语歌曲

3、复习

学习操练新的知识: don’t feel well;have a headache;have a fever;take medicine;enjoy themselves;invite;ill;sick 等等 教师用课件出不同大小的动物或者物品比较大小高矮

教师一边展示句型条what’s wrong with you向他人表示关切的问候。学生根据实际情况回答。

Step 2 Presentation and drill

New words and new sentences

教师用课件或者单词卡片出事单词短语或句子帮助同学们复习已学过的单词don’t feel well;have a headache;have a fever;take medicine;enjoy themselves;invite;ill;sick 等等或者提供不同的图片让学生自由发挥

Step 3 Practice

1、教师分步骤循序渐进的引导学生们熟悉课文

2、评价。

3、练习。

4、家庭作业。听磁带,背课文。教学反思:

Period 2

教学目标

1、复习并巩固新单词和短语don’t feel well;have a headache;have a fever;take medicine;enjoy themselves;invite;ill;sick 等

2、能用“what’s wrong with you”向他人表示关切的问候

3、能能阅读理解D部分课文的内容

4、能根据课文回答问题

教学重点难点

重点:在语境中运用新的句型能用 “what’s wrong with you”向他人表示关切的问候;能运用合适的阅读技巧进行阅读。

难点能用 “what’s wrong with you”向他人表示关切的问候

教学准备Word cards, Type,CAI, Drawing Instrument

教学过程设计和安排

Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、唱英语歌曲

3、复习don’t feel well;have a headache;have a fever;take medicine;enjoy themselves;invite;ill;sick 等

Step 2 presentation

1、游戏操练:接龙。教师出示有关本课的图片,进行句子操练,看哪一组的句子多。

2、让学生们根据CAI图片, 让同学们运用句型造句。

3、用 “what’s wrong with you”向他人表示关切的问候

Step3 分组进行游戏,每组将老师的句子读给后面的同学看谁能快点完成

/ 37

Step 4 Consolidation

1、根据黑板上的单词及图片复述课文。

2、评价。

3、练习。

4、家庭作业。听磁带,背课文。

教学反思:

Period 3

教学目标

1、复习并进一步巩固新单词和短语don’t feel well;have a headache;have a fever;take medicine;enjoy themselves;invite;ill;sick 等

2、能够灵活运用“what’s wrong with you”向他人表示关切的问候

教学重点难点

重点:掌握本单元四会单词。难点:根据E部分完成句子

教学准备Word cards, Type,CAI, Drawing Instrument

教学过程设计和安排

Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、唱英语歌曲

3、复习don’t feel well;have a headache;have a fever;take medicine;enjoy themselves;invite;ill;sick 等 ,Step 2 Presentation and drill

出示一些图片让同学讲讲图中所示是怎样的问题

Step 3 Practice

1有同学表演生病的情况,然后由一部分同学来猜,看谁能猜得更多

Step 4 Consolidation

1、背诵Part A。

2、评价。

3、练习。

4、家庭作业。听磁带,背课文。

教学反思:

/ 37

Unit 11 shall we go to the theatre?

学情分析:

学生已掌握运用一般过去时描述人物进行过的活动,和运用一般现在时描述经常发生的行为、活动以及理解第三人称单数做主语的一般现在时动词的用法,本单元话题为征求别人的意见或建议,可以让同学之间相处更有礼貌更融洽。创立多种对话情景。不仅更能加强学生对于学习的兴趣,更能能加强孩子们对于礼仪的认知。课时安排

A, B

1课时

C, D

1课时 E, F

1课时

教学目标

语音功能: 使用征求意见或表达建议的用语进行交际,并对他人的询问做出回答 语言结构: shall we go to the theatre? 词汇

掌握词汇theatre;concert;hall;film;idear 理解词汇:newspapper;circus;diary;yourselves 语法:祈使句 一般将来时 一般过去时

Period 1

教学目标

1、复习并熟练运用新单词和短语

2、theatre;concert;hall;film;idear;newspapper;circus;diary;yourselves 等

3、能用 “shall we…;let’s…”向他人征求意见

4、能正确的回答

5、会说A部分内容

教学重点难点

重点:能够听懂会说,认读新的theatre;concert;hall;film;idear;newspapper;circus;diary;yourselves 等单词或者短语。

难点:能正确理解记忆B部分词组

教学准备:用于教授单词的卡片,图片,多媒体课件等

教学过程设计和安排

Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、唱英语歌曲

3、复习

学习操练新的知识: theatre;concert;hall;film;idear;newspapper;circus;diary;yourselves 等

情境对话,同学之间假定用电话交流,交流明天的意见

教师一边展示句型条“shall we…;let’s…”向他人征求意见。学生根据实际情况回答。

Step 2 Presentation and drill

/ 37

New words and new sentences

1、教师用课件或者单词卡片出事单词短语或句子帮助同学们复习已学过的单词theatre;concert;hall;film;idear;newspapper;circus;diary;yourselves 等 或者提供不同的图片让学生自由发挥

Step 3 Practice

1、教师分步骤循序渐进的引导学生们熟悉课文

2、评价。

3、练习。

4、家庭作业。听磁带,背课文。

教学反思英国著名语言家c.e 埃克斯利说:“教英语的最好方法就是能引起学生学习英语兴趣的那种方法。”我们在单词教学中不能一味让学生死记硬背,而应尝试运用多种形式巧记,如采用儿歌、猜谜语、简笔画等形式。

Period 2

教学目标

1、复习并巩固新单词和短语

theatre;concert;hall;film;idear;newspapper;circus;diary;yourselves 等

2、能用“shall we…;let’s…”向他人征求意见

3、能能阅读理解D部分课文的内容

4、能根据课文回答问题

教学重点难点

重点:在语境中运用新的句型能用“shall we…;let’s…”向他人征求意见;能运用合适的阅读技巧进行阅读。

难点: 能用“shall we…;let’s…”向他人征求意见

教学准备Word cards, Type,CAI, Drawing Instrument

教学过程设计和安排

Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、唱英语歌曲

3、复习theatre;concert;hall;film;idear;newspapper;circus;diary;yourselves 等

Step 2 presentation

1、游戏操练:接龙。教师出示有关本课的图片,进行句子操练,看哪一组的句子多。

2、让学生们根据CAI图片, 让同学们运用句型造句。

3、用“shall we…;let’s…”向他人征求意见

Step3 分组进行游戏,每组将老师的句子读给后面的同学看谁能快点完成Step 4 Consolidation

1、根据黑板上的单词及图片复述课文。

2、评价。

3、练习。

4、家庭作业。听磁带,背课文。

教学反思:

/ 37

Period 3

教学目标

1、复习并进一步巩固新单词和短语theatre;concert;hall;film;idear;newspapper;circus;diary;yourselves 等

2、能够灵活运用“shall we…;let’s…”向他人征求意见

教学重点难点

重点:掌握本单元四会单词。难点:根据E部分完成句子

教学准备Word cards, Type,CAI, Drawing Instrument

教学过程设计和安排

Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、唱英语歌曲

3、复习theatre;concert;hall;film;idear;newspapper;circus;diary;yourselves 等

Step 2 Presentation and drill

出示一些图片让同学讲讲图中所示是怎样的问题

Step 3 Practice

由同学表达自己的困难让其他的同学帮助其解决

Step 4 Consolidation

1、背诵Part A。

2、评价。

3、练习。

4、家庭作业。听磁带,背课文。

教学反思:

我们在教学中应将传统教学手段与现代教学手段有效结合起来,按照新《课标》的要求,在教学思路和方法上求实、求新、求变;同时注意学生在学习方法上的突破,养成良好的学习习惯和形成有效的学习策略,培养自主学习的能力以及观察、记忆、思维、想象能力和创新精神,拓展视野,为他们的终身学习和发展打下良好的基础。

Unit 12 it’s Christmas again

学情分析:

/ 37

学生已掌握运用一般过去时描述人物进行过的活动,和运用一般现在时描述经常发生的行为、活动以及理解第三人称单数做主语的一般现在时动词的用法,本单元话题为圣诞节,让同学们抱着一颗好奇心来学习,可以让同学之间相处更有礼貌更融洽。创立多种对话情景。不仅更能加强学生对于学习的兴趣,更能能加强孩子们对于圣诞节的认知。课时安排

A, B

1课时

C, D

1课时 E, F

1课时

教学目标

语音功能: 与朋友一起欢度圣诞 语言结构: it’s Christmas again 词汇

掌握词汇merry;Christmas;dress up;put up;decorate;理解词汇:pudding;roast turkey;ham 语法: 一般将来时 一般现在时

Period 1

教学目标

1、复习并熟练运用新单词和短语

2、merry;Christmas;dress up;put up;decorate;pudding;roast turkey;ham等

3、能用 “here’s a ….for you ”互赠礼物

4、能正确的回答

5、会说A部分内容

教学重点难点

重点:能够听懂,会说,认读新的merry;Christmas;dress up;put up;decorate;pudding;roast turkey;ham等单词或者短语。难点:能正确理解记忆B部分词组

教学准备:用于教授单词的卡片,图片,多媒体课件等

教学过程设计和安排

Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、唱英语歌曲

3、复习

学习操练新的知识: merry;Christmas;dress up;put up;decorate;pudding;roast turkey;ham等

情境对话,同学之间假定用电话交流,交流明天的意见

教师一边展示句型条能用 “here’s a ….for you ”互赠礼物。学生根据实际情况回答。

Step 2 Presentation and drill

New words and new sentences

1、教师用课件或者单词卡片出事单词短语或句子帮助同学们复习已学过的单词merry;Christmas;dress up;put up;decorate;pudding;roast turkey;ham等或者提供不同的图片让学生自由发挥

/ 37

Step 3 Practice

1、教师分步骤循序渐进的引导学生们熟悉课文

2、评价。

3、练习。

4、家庭作业。听磁带,背课文。

教学反思:

Period 2

教学目标

1、复习并巩固新单词和短语

merry;Christmas;dress up;put up;decorate;pudding;roast turkey;ham等

2、能用能用 “here’s a ….for you ”互赠礼物

3、能能阅读理解D部分课文的内容

4、能根据课文回答问题

教学重点难点

重点:在语境中运用新的句型能用“shall we…;let’s…”向他人征求意见;能运用合适的阅读技巧进行阅读。

难点 能用“shall we…;let’s…”向他人征求意见

教学准备Word cards, Type,CAI, Drawing Instrument

教学过程设计和安排

Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、唱英语歌曲

3、复习merry;Christmas;dress up;put up;decorate;pudding;roast turkey;ham等

Step 2 presentation

1、游戏操练接龙。教师出示有关本课的图片,进行句子操练,看哪一组的句子多。

2、让学生们根据CAI图片, 让同学们运用句型造句。

3、能用 “here’s a ….for you ”互赠礼物

Step3 分组进行游戏,每组将老师的句子读给后面的同学看谁能快点完成 Step 4 Consolidation

1、根据黑板上的单词及图片复述课文。

2、评价。

3、练习。

4、家庭作业。听磁带,背课文。

教学反思:

Period 3

教学目标

/ 37

1、复习并进一步巩固新单词和短语merry;Christmas;dress up;put up;decorate;pudding;roast turkey;ham等

2、能够灵活运用能用 “here’s a ….for you ”互赠礼物

教学重点难点

重点:掌握本单元四会单词。难点:根据E部分完成句子

教学准备Word cards, Type,CAI, Drawing Instrument

教学过程设计和安排

Step 1 Warming up

1、师生问候。

2、唱英语歌曲

3、复习merry;Christmas;dress up;put up;decorate;pudding;roast turkey;ham等

Step 2 Presentation and drill

出示一些图片让同学讲讲图中所示是怎样的问题

Step 3 Practice

由同学表达自己的困难让其他的同学帮助其解决

Step 4 Consolidation

1、背诵Part A。

2、评价。

3、练习。

4、家庭作业。听磁带,背课文。

教学反思:

/ 37

第二篇:湘少版六年级上册英语教案

六年级上学期英语教学计划

一、教材分析

根据―课程标准‖要求进行编写,以―话题---功能---结构---任务‖相结合的原则,力求使话题、功能、结构和任务四个方面在比较真实的情景中紧密联系,融为一体;本教材提倡―任务型‖的教学模式,让学生在教师的指导下,通过感知、体验、实践、参与和合作等方式,实现任务的目标,感受成功。在学习过程中进行情感和策略调整,以形成积极的学习态度,促进语言实际运用能力的提高。

本教材共有14个单元组成,其中第一~第八,第九~第十四单元为新授单元,主要有A、B、C、D、E、F六个板块构,以下主要分析新授单元各板块。A Listen and say 情景对话教学。

本板块除了仍然有对话理解的背景材料外,对话篇幅明显增长,难度也增加,主要出现的语法有一般现在时(第三人称单数作主语)、现在进行时、一般过去时;情态动词、there be结构等等。通过该板块的教学,着重训练学生的朗读能力和会话能力。在教学中,教师要尽量创设交际活动的情景,增强语言实践的真实感,并采用―先听说、后读写,先整体、后局部‖的方法,引导和鼓励学生积极、主动地参加语言实践活动。

B Let‘s listen and read 词汇教学。主要按话题归类和图词结合的方式呈现新的词语,有名词、动词、短语或他们的混合形式及过去式。在这些词语中,有的在前面已经出现过,但有的是第一次出现;有的只要求―三会‖,有的却要求掌握。教师在教学中,要尽可能用学生已知的情景引出新的词语;并与句型教学有机地结合起来,使学生能在情景中学习和运用词汇;不能盲目提高要求,应承认学生认知水平的差异性。

C A bout the story 阅读教学 本板块为语篇的听力理解和对话的阅读理解训练,着重培养学生理解和书写的能力。教师在教学中,要充分挖掘课本所提供的材料,为学生营造较为宽松的环境,进行由浅入深的训练;要把握好听的时机,为有困难的学生提供多听的机会;要利用讲评为学生提供再次练习的机会。

D Let‘s practice 句型的口语训练教学。本板块以图为主,提供了主要句型,旨在通过比较真实的语言情境滚动的方法操练本单元和已学过的内容。学习句型的目的是为了掌握句子结构,以便在适当的交际情景中运用这些句型去表达思想,因此句型应放在情景中操练,力求使学生通过操练学到现实生活中有交际价值的语言。教师在教学中,要尽量减少机械操练,创设较真实的情景,以小组活动为主,鼓励学生积极参与,对于不同层次的学生都要给予肯定;发现问题,要及时纠正,并进行语法现象的归纳和总结。

E Let‘s read and write 读写 本板块是课文学习的延伸,通过阅读、观察,培养学生的理解和判断能力,养成良好的阅读习惯。教师应鼓励学生课前预习,以初步理解所学内容;教学中,教师要运用图片、简笔画,多媒体等直观手段,让学生整体感知语篇内容。教师要加强对学困生的关注,尽可能为他们提供展示的机会;为学有余力的学生提供看图说话或文字材料复述的机会。

F Let‘s find out 本板块是趣味性的综合练习。通过游戏、调查、做手工等活动巩固所学内容,培养学生的听、说、读、写能力和注意、观察、记忆、思维、想象、动手等能力。教师要鼓励学生积极参与这些活动,让他们通过模仿、体验、实践和合作等方式发展能力和智力,感受成功的喜悦。教师在教学中,要根据所教学生的特点做到有详有略,合理安排;利用教学资源,培养学生自主学习意识。总之,英语活动课的设计一定要以语言的运用为出发点和落脚点。

两个复习单元,通过形式多样、生动活泼的练习,有计划、有重点地综合复习所学词语、句型和日常交际用语。在教学时,教师可根据具体情况将这些板块重新组合,也可适当增加内容,使学生更好地复习所学内容,完成学习任务。

二、学生情况分析:

经过三年的学习,大部分学生对英语仍然保持着浓厚的兴趣,但有少数学生由于遇到困难,学习兴趣可能会开始减退。因此,这个学期在教学中,教师应该以学生的发展为宗旨,以培养学生的创新精神和实践能力为重点,面向全体学生,在激发学生兴趣的同时,扎扎实实地从每个学生抓起。六年级的学生学习比较理性。教师在以活动为课堂教学的主要形式的同时,要充分发挥任务性教学在高年级的优化使用,设计丰富多彩的教学活动,有效的教学任务。

同时注意到学生中存在的两极分化,教学内容注意由简到难,循序渐进,在知识的复现中做好及时补差工作。充分培养学生的听说读写能力,尤其要加强识读,拼写的能力。重视阅读能力和写作能力的同步培养。重视英语作为语言的交际功能。

三、培养的学习目标

1按四会与三会要求掌握所学的单词。2能按四会要求掌握所学的句型。

3能运用日常交际用语,活用四会句型,进行简单的交流,并做到大胆开口,发音正确,所用话语与场合符合。

4能在图片、手势,情景等非语言提示的帮助下,听懂清晰的话语与录音。5培养良好的书写习惯,能做到书写规范整洁。

6培养良好的听英语、读英语、说英语、用英语的习惯,能自觉的模仿语音、语调,逐步培养语感。

7能在任务型学习的过程中运用相关的语言知识,完成某项任务,并促使语言能力的提高。

8能演唱以学过的英语歌曲,朗诵已学过的歌谣。9能渗透给学生良好的自学英语的方法。

四、教学措施

1、课堂上尽量使用英语组织教学,做到持之以恒,由少积多,以助于创造英语气氛,养成学生听英语,用英语思维的习惯。

2、学生的特征,可将每个单元,该单元的教学内容重新组合,科学合理的把单词教学,对话操练,复习巩固融为一体。

3、多以图片、手势呈现英语单词及对话情景,图片呈现采用灵活多样的方法将该单元所学的内容柔和在一起进行综合操练。如师生快速问候和介绍、学生间连续的相互问候和介绍,创设情景进行表演等,让学生将所学的对话用于不同的情景。采用先听说,后读写,先整体,后局部的方法教学。

教学中,尽量开展形式多样的活动教学,活跃气氛提高兴趣和学习效率。

5、词汇教学上,尽量利用实物和图片,增加复现次数,反复循环,循序渐进,注重师生操练、生生操练。

6、逐步渗透任务型教学,培养学生活用英语,用英语完成任务的本领。

A适当增加教学内容量,以滚动式教学,以反复渗透巩固的方法提高学习效率。B语音教学中采用―分散出现,集中归纳,经常接触‖的方法。C初步渗透任务型教学的教学理念。

五、教学进度安排

课次 课时 周次 Unit 1、2 5 1-2 Unit 3 5 3-4 Unit 4、5 5 5-7 Unit 6 5 8-9 Unit7、8 5 10 Unit 9 5 11-12 Unit 10、11 5 13-14 Unit 12 5 15-16 Unit13 5 17-18 Unit14 5 19

Unit one

The children are playing in the park

Period 1 Teaching targets.1. The target of knowledge: 1)Learn these new words: slide, bench, bark, chain, swing 2)Learn these sentences: be doing sth 2. The targets of skills: 1)Can understand the four –skill words.2)Can understand the sentence structure.3)Can describe the other ‗s actions.3.The targets of emotion: To love the living surrounding.Main points :The new words and sentences.Difficult point: Can describe the other ‗s actions.Teaching method and Learning way: CAI Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up Greetings.Learn to sing a song

Use the cards to go over the new dialogue Game—Quick response Retell the story Step2 Presentation and drill 1.T : Hello,boys and girls ,nice to meet you again,today is the first day of this term.let‘s go to a park and have a look,what will happen in the park!Show a picture of a park ,learn the new words A swing Show a swing and says : This is a swing ,let‘s put it in the park,write the word on the blackboard.Leads reading the new word 2.Show the pictures and put them on the picture(in the park),and learn to say the words.3.Leads reading the words,and requires the pupils to act as a little teacher,leads reading 4.Look and say: High and low voice Step3 Fast reading and listening 1)Show the pictures

T introduces the situation and requires the pupils to read the dialogue by themselves

2)Listen and repeat ,leads reading 3)Listen and imitation Step4 Instive doing Reading the dialogue carefully Listen and repeat the dialogue Retell the story ,check the resul

Period 2 Teaching targets.1)Consolidate these new words: slide, bench, bark, chain, swing 2)Can master these sentences: be doing sth 3)Can retell the story 2.The targets of emotion: To love the living surrounding.Main points :The new words and sentences.Difficult point: Can describe the other ‗s actions.retell the story Teaching aids : cards,tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up Greetings.Learn to sing a song

Use the cards to go over the new dialogue Game—Quick response Retell the story Step2 Presentation and drill 1.T :Let‘s listen and repeat the story together

Show the new words ,requires the pupils to read ,go over the words.Teacher explin the grammar for the pupils ,and asks them to make sentences with the present time am/is/are +doing Step3 Practice 1)Show the pictures

T introduces the situation and requires the pupils to read the dialogue by themselves

2)Listen and repeat ,leads reading 3)Listen and imitation Step4 Consolidation 1)Make a stuation and have a dialogue with their partners, choose some to act it out A: Sports meeting ,the children are watching the athelets.They‘re talking about the sports.2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and read the dialogue, copy the new words No

Period 3 Teaching targets.1)Go over these four-skill words 2)Learn to sing a song 3)Can finish Part F Main points : The new words and sentences, the English song Difficult point: Can describe the other‘s actions;learn to sing the song Teaching aids : cards ,tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up Greetings.Go over the four-skill words Play a game – magic eyes 3.Use the cards to go over the new dialogue ,and make sentences with the present time ,they are required not to make the same sentences 4.Retell the story Step2 Presentation and drill 1.Part E Listen to the tape and requires them to read the words ,and try to say the words 2.ow the new words ,leads reading ,and learn to sing the song.3.Listen to tape and follow it ,sing the song together Step3 Practice 1)Part F Explain the situation for the class(The children want to see a film , requires pupils to find out how the children reach the cinema)2)Requires the pupils to find the answers ,say their answers first ,then write down on the book.Step4 Consolidation 1)Make a situation and have a dialogue with their partners, choose some to act it out 2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and read the dialogue, copy the new words ,and try to recite the story Notes:

Unit2 Katie always gets up early

Period 1 Teaching targets.1. The target of knowledge: Learn these new words: wake up, make the bed, wave, I‘m late 2)Learn these sentences: sb do sth at some time(the third time)2. The targets of skills: 1)Can understand the four –skill words.2)Can understand the sentence structure.3)Can describe the other ‗s actions.(the third time)3.The targets of emotion: To form the health living habit Main points :The new words and sentences.Difficult point:sb do(does)sth at some time.Teaching method and Learning way: CAI Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Learn to sing a song-London Bridge is falling down 3.Use the cards to go over the words Game—Guess ,guess, guess 4.Retell the story—Unit 1 Step2 Presentation and drill 1.T : You‘re very good.You are all good pupils.And Katie ia a good pupil too.Everyone likes her.She is never late for school.She always gets up early every day.Then she makes bed.after breakfast, she waves her family goodbye.T says the sentences and does the actions to helps pupils to understand the meanings.learn the new words Lead reading the words and check the results.According to the words ,sk some questions and requires pupils to answer the questions.T: Do you get up early everyday?… 2.Game –Patting flies.3.Leads reading the words,and requires the pupils to act as a little teacher,leads reading 4.Look and say: High and low voice Step3 Fast reading and listening Read the dialogue quickly ,then answer the following question What time does Katie‘s father leave for work?

T introduces the situation and requires the pupils to read the dialogue by themselves

2)Listen and imitation Step4 Intensive doing 1)Reading the dialogue carefully 2)Listen and repeat the dialogue 3)Retell the story ,check the resul

Period 2 Teaching targets.1)Consolidate these new words 2)Can master these sentence structure: sb do(does)sth every day 3)Can retell the story 2.The targets of emotion: To love the life.Main points :The new words and sentences.Difficult point: Can use the present time of the third person Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.sing a song

3.Use the cards to go over the words Game—Golden finger Say something about your daily life Step2 Presentation and drill Show the new words : always ,often , usually ,never Requires the pupils to read ,go over the words.Teacher explin the grammar for the pupils.Ask stuents to read the dialogue of Part A ,then the dtudents are required to draw line under the adv.Eg.Katie always get up early.Notes: always表示―老是,总是,一直‖与NEVER相对 Never表示―永不,决不,从来没有‖ Often表示―常常,时常,通常‖ Usually表示―惯常地,通常地‖ Step3 Practice 1)Part D 1)ractice in pairs,according to the form to say something about Peter‘s day.2)Group work

3)Finish the hand writing ,then check the answers Step4 Consolidation always often usually never Makes breakfast for family Washes clothes in the morning Cooks dinner for the hildren ….1)Make a stuation and have a dialogue with their partners, choose some to act it out 2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and read the dialogue, copy the new words Notes:

Period 3 Teaching targets.1)Go over these four-skill word, text,grammar 2)Can finish Part E Main points : The new words and sentences

Difficult point: Can describe the other‘s actions ,make differences between ―always,never,often,usually‖

Teaching aids : cards ,tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Go over the four-skill words 3.Use the cards to go over the new dialogue ,and make sentences with ―always,never,often,usually‖

Step2 Presentation and drill 1.Explain the sentences for the class ,then requires the pupils to communicate with others ,according to the information in the form.2.Part E Listen to the tape and requires them to finish Part E,check the answers.3.Listen to tape and follow it

4.Requires the pupils to find the answers ,say their answers first ,then write down on the book.Step3 Consolidation 1)Make a situation and have a dialogue with their partners, choose some to act it out 2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and read the dialogue, copy the new words ,and try to recite text Notes:

Unit3 Let‘s go to the Underwater World

Period 1 Teaching targets.1.The target of knowledge: 1)Learn these new words: underwater world , picnic, library,science story 2)Learn these sentences: sb do sth at some time(the third time)2.The targets of skills: 1)Can understand the four –skill words.2)Can understand the sentence structure: the imperative sentence Can describe person‘s willing with the imperative sentence 3.The targets of emotion: Can describe person‘s willing with the imperative sentence Main points :The new words and the imperative sentence.Difficult point: Let‘s do sth.Teaching method and Learning way: CAI Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Free talk: say something about their daily life Step2 Presentation and drill 1.T : Hello ,boys and girls.I don‘t feel happy today ,can you guess why? Requires the pupils to guess the reasons.Ss: …

T :Let me tell you , My new watch missing yesterday(show a watch)I want to go to the library to read the science stories ,but my friend told me it was not open.I want to the park for a pinic,but my friend wanted to go to the shopping center.Say the words and show the cards ,helps pupils to understand the meanings.learn the new words Lead reading the words and check the results.2.Game –Patting flies.3.Leads reading the words,and requires the pupils to act as a little teacher, leads reading Step3 Fast reading and listening 1.Read the dialogue quickly ,then answer the following question Where did the go?

T introduces the situation and requires the pupils to find the answer.2)Listen and imitation Step4 Intensive doing 1)Reading the dialogue carefully,then finish the form pople Suggestions Peter Go to the Underwater World

Ling ling Go to the park for a picnic/go to the shopping center Mingming Go to the library Anne Go to the beach Results Too late to go out 2)Listen and repeat the dialogue 3)According to the form,retell the story Finish patC ,then listen and repeat Step5 Consolidation Require the pupils to act it out Estimation Homework: Listen and repeat the text ,copy the words and sentences Notes:

Period 2 Teaching targets.1)Can master these sentence structure: the imperative sentence 2)Can retell the story 2.The targets of emotion: To love the life.Main points :The new words and sentence structure.Difficult point: Can use the imperative sentence Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.sing a song

3.Use the cards to go over the words Game—Golden finger Look at the picture and retell the dailogue Step2 Presentation and drill 1.T:Ok,you ‗ve done a good job.today is very hot,I feel very thirsty.Are you thirsty now?I want to have some water Hmm,I‘m not thirsty.But I don‘t have breakfast ,I feel hungry…

Lead the pupils to say :Let‘s go to the hospital!Teacher explin the words for the pupils.Lead reading :sick,hungry ,hot,thirsty,bored 2.Do and say(Game)Game—Making friend Hot thirsty bored hungry happy sick Restaurant swimming pool , cinema park hospital cafe Step3 Practice 1.Part D 1)Finish Pard D 2)Group work: Have a competition

Put the cards into a box ,requires pupils to choose one card ,and make a sentence Eg:hot I feel hot ,I want to the swimming pool Step4 Consolidation Make a stuation and have a dialogue with their partners, choose some to act it out Discuss where do you want to go ,take a note 2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and read the dialogue, copy the new words , recite the text Notes:

Period 3 Teaching targets.1)Go over these four-skill word, text,grammar 2)Can finish Part E,F Main points : To consolidate the grammar Difficult point: To improve the ability of speaking Teaching aids : cards ,tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Sing an English song Game –Guess,guess,guess Choose a card and do the action, requires pupils to guess Step2 Presentation and drill T: I want to buy some milk ,where can I go? S: You can go to the supermarket T: I wan to see a football game ,where can I go? S: You can go to the stadium …

Have a free talk with their partners Game—Quick response T says the name of the place ,requires the pupils to say the activity which we can have Eg: S1:Cinema S2:See a film …

Step3 Consolidation 1)Make a situation and have a dialogue with their partners, choose some to act it out 2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and read the dialogue, copy the new words ,and try to recite text Notes:

Unit4 It‘s the Mid-Autumn Festive

Period 1 Teaching targets.1.The target of knowledge: Learn these new words: egg yolk , grapes, tea , mooncake 2)Learn to tell the story.2.The targets of skills: 1)Can understand the four –skill words.2)Can tell the story and understand some traditional festive culture 3.The targets of emotion: To filter the education of east-west culture ,to encourage the interesting of study Main points :Understand the story and retell it.Difficult point: Retell the story.Teaching method and Learning way: CAI Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Sing a song.3.Retell or act out the Unit2 Step2 Presentation and drill 1.Lead in the new dialogue and learn the new words : mooncake , eggyolk ,grapes

T: I‘m hungry ,I want to eat this after class.Do you know what it is?

Lead the pupils to answer like this: It‘s a mooncake

Write the word and lead reading : mooncake , the Mid-Autumn Festive , eggyolk , grapes Lead reading the words and check the results.2.Game –Magic eyes.3.Game –Brain storn Step3 Fast reading and listening 1.Read the dialogue quickly ,then answer the following question How could Chang‘e fly to the moon? 2.Listen and imitation Step4 Intensive reading 1)Reading the dialogue carefully,then answer the following questions: Why did Chang‘e take the magic medicine? What did shi bring with her to the moon? Was Chang‘e happy on the moon?

How did people celebrate Mid—Autumn Festive? 2)Listen and repeat the dialogue 3)Choose one picture to retell the story Step5 Consolidation Show the picture about the story ,and give them the key words ,retell the story Estimation Homework: Listen and repeat the text ,copy the words and sentences

Period 2 Teaching targets.1)Can master these words and phrases: shall,except ,each other 2)Canact out the story 2.The targets of emotion: To understand the festive culture of traditional festive Main points :The new words and sentence structure.Difficult point: Can act out the story Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Use the cards to go over the words

3.Look at the picture and retell the dialogue,have a match Step2 Presentation and drill T put an ornament of Chang‘e

T: I want to fly to the moon,I shall take this medicine Help pupils to understand the meaning

T: I feel so lonely here.There is no one except the rabbit and me.I miss my husband.We miss each other very much.2.Learn to say the new words 3.Require the class to estimate the teacher‘s performance

4.Read the story ,then act out the story(three pupils as a group)Step3 Practice 1.Game--Brain storm Game—Little actor Step4 Consolidation 1)Make a stuation and have a dialogue with their partners, choose some to act it out Discuss where do you want to go ,take a note 2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and read the dialogue, copy the new words , recite the text Notes:

Period 3 Teaching targets.1)Go over these four-skill words Can sing the song:Do Re Mi To cultivate the pupils‘ patriotism, to promote their culture knowleage Main points : To consolidate the words and can sing the song :Do Re Mi Difficult point: Read and understand the text ,to grasp the divergence of east-west culture

Teaching aids : cards ,tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Sing an English song Game – Make friends Choose a card put the cards to the stickers Step2 Presentation and drill 1.T: I want to buy some milk ,where can I go? S: You can go to the supermarket T: I wan to see a football game ,where can I go? S: You can go to the stadium …

2.Have a free talk with their partners 3.Game—Quick response Step3 Consolidation 1)Make a situation and have a dialogue with their partners, choose some to act it out 2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and read the dialogue, copy the new words ,and try to recite text

Unit5 The children are playing noisily

Period 1 Teaching targets.1.The target of knowledge: 1)Learn these new words:living room,phone,loudly,noisly,quietly Learn to tell the story.2.The targets of skills: 1)Can understand the four –skill words.2)Can use the adv.skillfully 3.The targets of emotion: To filter the education of good-manners ,to help students to form the habit of good behavior Main points :Understand the story and retell it.Difficult point: Retell the story.Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Sing a song.Do Re Mi 3.Retell or act out the Unit4 Step2 Presentation and drill 1.Lead in the new dialogue and learn the new words : living room,phone,loudly,noisily,quietly T: Who are they?They are my friends,Lingling and Dongdong,Do you know where they were yesterday?They were in my home.T describes the situation vividly, lead the pupils to understand with exaggerational countenance and objects.T:…

Write the word and lead reading the new words,explain the words for the students.Lead reading the words and check the results.2.Game –Look and say(Consolidate the adv.)Step3 Fast reading and listening 1.Read the dialogue quickly ,then answer the following question What ‗s the weather like today?

Why can‘t Mrs.Chen hear herfriend on the phone? 2.To help the pupils to understand the word: heavily

3.Listen and imitation(Ask the pupils to find the adv.And draw out)Step4 Intensive reading 1)Reading the dialogue carefully,then answer the following questions: Who is Mrs.Chen talking to? What are the children doing in the living room? How is Dongdong playing? Who is talking louding? 2)Listen and repeat the dialogue 3)Choose one picture to retell the story Step5 Consolidation Retell the story,finish the following form it Rain heavily outside Lingling and Dongdong Play noisily in the living room Mrs.Chen Talk not clearly on the phone Dongdong Play noisily Lingling Talk loudly Lingling and dongdong Play quietly in the bedroom Estimation(评价)Homework: Listen and repeat the text ,copy the words and sentences Notes:

Period 2 Teaching targets.1)Can master and perform the adv.:slowly,quickly,softly 2)Can act out the story 2.The targets of emotion: To filter their interestings of learning English Main points :The new words and sentence structure.Difficult point: Can act out the story Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Use the cards to go over the words 3.Game—Quick response 4.Look at the picture and retell the dialogue,have a match Step2 Presentation and drill Countiue the game,lead in the new words T walks slowly, guides the pupils to describe the teacher‘s action:The teacher is walking slowly Help pupils to understand the meaning,learn to say the words 2.Learn to say the other new words:softly,speak;Play a game—Singing different tune T: Speak slowly Ss:Speak quickly ……

Step3 Practice 1.Part D Devide into groups,requires the groups to describe the pictures orally.Finish writing exercises ,(can discuss by groups)Step4 Consolidation 1)Free talk(The teacher introduce herself in English with different speaking speed ,to edify the students to express their willings politely)2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and read the dialogue, copy the new words , recite the text

Period 3 Teaching targets.1)Go over these four-skill words 2)Can advance the ability of performing language comprehensively 3)Can enhance the interestings of learning English Main points : To consolidate the words

Difficult point: Read and understand the text ,to grasp the divergence of east-west culture

Teaching aids : cards ,tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Sing a song 3.Go over the words Requires threestudents to play game,one puts up a word(verb),another put up a word(adv.),the others make a sentence with the two words 4.Free talk and performance Step2 Presentation and drill PartE T points to the Mrs.Zhao T: Who is she? Ss:She is Mrs.Zhao T: What is she doing? Answer: She is dancing happily 2.Use the same way to learn another words:politely,carefully 2.Have a free talk with their partners 3.Game—Quick response Step3 Practice Requires the students to express :what is..doing PartF T:What are they doing ? 3.Listen and sing Step4Consolidation Make a situation and have a dialogue with their partners, choose some to act it out Situation: one morning ,you and your friend go to the park,you see many people are doing morning exercises ,you are talking about it 2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and read the dialogue, copy the new words ,and try to recite text

Unit6 How tall are you

Period 1 Teaching targets.1.The target of knowledge: Learn these new words: week,worried,scared,measure,weigh, Heavy,light 2)Can understand and retell the text 2.The targets of skills: To improve the skills of listening ,speaking ,reading and writing To improve the ability of performing language comprehensively 3.The targets of emotion: To filter the physique education Main points :Understand the story and retell it.Difficult point: Retell the story ,the method of special question Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Perform the song :Row your boat Use the cards to go over the words Game—Magic eye Game—What‘s missing

4.Retell or act out the Unit4 Step2 Presentation and drill 1.Lead in the new dialogue and learn the new words : week, worried, scared, measure, weigh, Heavy, light T show a phote of baby(a student‘s phote).T:Look,he is one of our classmate.He looked very weak Write the word and lead reading the new word ,explain the words for the students.T: his mother measured him,and he was only 90centimetres,his mother weighed him,he wad only 12 kilogrammers.Use the same way to learn the other words Lead reading the words and check the results.Show another photo

T: Look,he grows fast.Who is he? Do you know?(point out the pupil)T: Is he light now? Ss: No ,he is heavy Learn the new words,lead reading the topic sentence and the words.3.Game –Look and say(Consolidate the adv.)Step3 Fast reading and listening 1.Read the dialogue quickly ,then answer the following question T: This is Peter ,he is weak,his mother is worried about him,what‘s the matter with him?Let‘s read the text quickly and try to answer How did Peter feel when he saw the doctor? Was the doctor friendly?what did he do? 2.To help the pupils to understand the word: scared 3.Listen and imitation(Ask the pupils to find the adv.And draw out)Step4 Intensive reading 1)Reading the dialogue carefully, hen answer the following questions: Where did Peter go? Why did Peter go there? How old was he? How tall(heavy)was he? 2)Listen and answer the questions 3)Choose one picture to retell the story Step5 Consolidation Retell the story,finish the following form Estimation(评价)Estimate the performance of the pupils‘, conform and encourage,to filter their potential of learning English Homework: Listen and repeat the text ,copy the words and sentences Notes:

Period 2 Teaching targets.1)Can master and perform the sentence structure 2)Can improve the skills of learning English 3)Can further the interestings of learning English 2.The targets of emotion: To filter their interestings of learning English Main points :To master the special question of questioning the other‘s basic situation Difficult point:To improve the ability of performing language comprehensively Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Sing a song:Row your boat 3.Look at the picture and retell the dialogue,have a match Step2 Presentation and drill Introduce a new friend T:Today ,I‘llintroduce you a new friend,please ask him some quedtions.ok? Ss:OK!T:My name is Sun Wukong Ss:How old are you ? T:I‘m very old.Ss:…

2.Play a game—Quick renponse Step3 Practice 1.Part D Devide into groups,requires the groups to describe the pictures orally.Finish writing exercises ,(can discuss by groups)Step4 Consolidation 1)Free talk(The teacher introduce herself in English with different speaking speed ,to edify the students to express their willings politely)2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and read the dialogue, copy the new words , recite the text Notes

Period 3 Teaching targets.1)Go over these four-skill words 2)Can advance the ability of performing language comprehensively 3)Can enhance the interestings of learning English Main points : To consolidate the words

Difficult point: Read and understand the text ,to grasp the divergence of east-west culture

Teaching aids : cards ,tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Sing a song 3.Go over the words Requires threestudents to play game,one puts up a word(verb),another put up a word(adv.),the others make a sentence with the two words 4.Free talk and performance Step2 Presentation and drill PartE T points to the Mrs.Zhao T: Who is she? Ss:She is Mrs.Zhao T: What is she doing? Answer: She is dancing happily 2.Use the same way to learn another words:politely,carefully 2.Have a free talk with their partners 3.Game—Quick response Step3 Practice Requires the students to express :what is..doing PartF T:What are they doing ? 3.Listen and sing Step4Consolidation 1)Make a situation and have a dialogue with their partners, 2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and read the dialogue, copy the new words ,and try to recite text

Unit7 These horns are too big

Period 1 Teaching targets.1.The target of knowledge: 1)Learn these new words:foolishi,bull,horn,kill,rbbed,idea,ugly Learn to tell the story.2.The targets of skills: 1)Can understand the four –skill words.2)Can use the sentence structure:These horns are too big to express the feature of the things 3.The targets of emotion: To educate the pupils not to believe bad-man easily Main points :Understand the story and use the sentence structure:These horns are too big to express the feature of the things Difficult point: Retell the story.Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Sing a song.Row your boat Game—Making friends Teacher puts the word cards on the Bb,requires the students to collocate into suitable phrases Beatuful, fat, tiger, pig, squirrel, tall, elephant, bird, strong, big, giraffe, small, monkey, naughty Step2 Presentation and drill Learn the new words:kill and foolish 1)Show a picture,a little with a bat in her hand T: What does she want to do? Help the pupils to answer like this:She wants to kill the fly.Write down the word and lead reading T:Can she kill the fly? Ss:No,she can‘t ,she is foolish

Write the word and lead reading the new words,explain the words for the students.Lead reading the words and check the results.2.Use the same way to learn the other words: bull, horn Step3 Fast reading and listening T: What do you think of the horns Ss: They are small.T: Yes, they are small, they are too small for the bull, Why are the bull‘s horns so small? 2.Read the dialogue quickly , then answer the following question Why are the bull‘s horns so small?

3.To help the pupils to understand the word: heavily 4.Listen and imitation Step4 Intensive reading 1)Reading the dialogue carefully,then answer the following questions: Where was the bull? What did the lion wan to do to the bull? What the lion say to the bull? What did the bull do? 2)Listen and repeat the dialogue Step5 Consolidation Retell the story,finish the following form(six elements of a narration)time Long,long again place In a field characters A lion and a bull reason The lion was hungry course the lion wants to eat the bull the horns are too big rubbed his horns against the tree smaller than the lion‘s ears

result The lion jumped on the bull and killed it Estimation(评价)Homework: Listen and retell the text ,copy the words and sentences

Period 2 Teaching targets.1)Can master and perform the adv.: too,just

2)Can use the adv.:too and just to discuss things 2.The targets of emotion: To filter their interestings of learning English Main points : Can use the adv.:too and just to discuss things Difficult point: To perceive the structure of sentence pattern:They are too small Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.Game—Linked heart T showa some words(foolish,bull,kill,rubbed,horns,idea)choose two pupils to take one word ,and remember in the heart ,the other pupils to guess which word the student choose Free talk

T:Are the bull‘s horns too big? Ss:No, they aren‘t

T:Why did the lion say that the bull‘s horns are too big? Ss:Because the lion wanted to kill the bull ….4.Look at the picture and retell the story Step2 Presentation and drill PartD Lead in the new dialogue,learn the sentence pattern T:Yseaterday was my birthday,my father /mother/husband just came back from Beijing,he/she bought some clothes for me,look,here they are(show a clothes)Doyou think it is ok for me?I don‘t think so,I think it is too big for me.Do you think so? Learn to say :It is too big T:Look ,what do you think of this one? Ss:It‘s too small

T: Yes ,I think so,I can‘t wear id ,it is too small.(show another one)T:Look this one ,what do you think of this one? Ss:It‘s just right for you

Learn to say this sentence:It‘s just right for you.3:Finish partC Play a game—Singing different tune Step3 Practice 1.Requires the pupils to make sentences with:it is too… T writes down the pupils‘ sentences

Clean one part of the sentences,ask pupils to add the last part KING OF REMEMBER Step4 Consolidation Free talk

Situation:MissLi is doing shopping in a supermarket ,she is satisfied with a sweater,she wants to try it one.2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and read the dialogue, copy the new words , recite the text Notes:

Period 3 Teaching targets.1`)To practice the usage of too 2)Can advance the ability of listening 3)Can enhance the interestings of learning English Main points : To practice the usage of too Difficult point: Understand a story by listening the story Teaching aids : cards ,tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Sing a song 3.Free talk and performance Step2 Presentation and drill T shows a jacket T: Can you wear this jacket? Ss:No,I can not.It‘s too small Write down the dialogue S1:Can you wear the jacket S2:No,I can not ,it‘s too small.Can you wear this pyjamas? Step3 Practice PartF Pair work,discuss the pictures,finish the exercise The bos is 500kg,I can‘t lift it,It is too heavy

I can not wear this pair of trousers.They are too long.I can‘t drink this tea,it‘s too hot

The toy car is 500yuan ,I can‘t buy it ,it‘s too expensive Step4Consolidation 1.PartF Look and answer the questions What do you learn from picture4 What do you learn from picture6 What do you learn from picture7 Listen and arrenage 2.Retell the story 3.Homework: Listen and read the dialogue, copy the new words ,and try to recite text

Unit8 My singing is louder than yours

Period 1 Teaching targets.1.The target of knowledge: 1)Learn these new words:garden ,hole,pleased,small,bigger,angry 2)Can understand and retell the text 2.The targets of skills: To improve the usage of adjective comparative degree To improve the ability of performing language comprehensively 3.The targets of emotion: To educate the pupils not to bully the small and weak Main points : To improve the usage of adjective comparative degree Difficult point: Understand the sentence pattern:…ate most of the food ,leaving only a little for the smaller bird Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record,picture Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Sing the song :Row your boat Step2 Presentation and drill 1.Lead in the new dialogue and learn the new words : 1)T show a picture of a garden T:Look,what ‗s this ? Ss:It‘s a garden

Learn to say the word:garden 2)T points to the hole T:Look,what ‗s this ? Ss:It‘s a hole

Learn to say the word:hole 3)T:Why are the birds looking at the hole? Encourage the pupils to elaborate their imagination,answer the question.Use the same way to learn the other words:smaller ,bigger Lead reading the words and check the results.4)T: Is he angry? Ss: Yes ,he is.Learn the new words,lead reading the topic sentence and the words.Step3 Fast reading and listening 1.Read the dialogue quickly ,then answer the following question Whose singing is louder ? Whose singing does the girl like better? 2.Listen and imitation Step4 Intensive reading Help the pupils to understand the sentence pattern:…ate most of the food ,leaving only a little for the smaller bird.1)Reading the dialogue carefully, then answer the following questions: Where did the birds live? What did the two birds look like? What happened to the smaller birds? Who gave food to the birds? 2)Listen and answer the questions 3)Finish Part C Step5 Consolidation Retell the story,finish the following form TIME Long,long again PLACE In a garden CHARACTER A smaller bird,a bigger bird,a girl REASON …… COURSE …….RESULT ……

Estimation(评价)Require the pupils to talk about how to not to bully the small and weak ,link with their reality

Homework: Listen and repeat the text ,copy the words and sentences

Period 2 Teaching targets.1)Can master and perform the form of the adjective comparative degree 2)Can use the adjective comparative degree to compara two things Main points : Use the adjective comparative degree to compara two things Difficult point: The form of the adjective comparative degree Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Sing a song

3.Look at the picture and retell the text:the horns are too big Step2 Presentation and drill 1.Requires the pupils to come to the Bb(one is thin,one is fat)T: S1 is fatter than S2,S2 is thinner thanS1 Learn to say the new words:thinner ,fatter Requires the pupils to come to the Bb(one is taller,one is shorter)T: S1 is shorter than S2,S2 is taller thanS1 Learn to say the new words: taller ,shorter 2.Play a game—Quick renponse Step3 Practice 1.Part D Finish writing exercises ,(can discuss by groups)2.Require two pupils to come to the Bb,ask the other to describe their classmates Step4 Consolidation Free talk(survey your classmates‘ birthday, height,weight ,fill in the form,then give a report)names birthday height weight Anne … …

2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and read the dialogue, copy the new words , recite the text Notes:

Period 3 Teaching targets.1)Can master and perform the form of the adjective comparative degree 2)Can use the adjective comparative degree to write a short paragraph Main points : Master and perform the form of the adjective comparative degree Difficult point: Use the adjective comparative degree to write a short paragraph Teaching aids : cards ,tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Sing a song 3.Retell the story Step2 Presentation and drill 1.PartE T shows a long and s short ruler T: My ruler is longer than yours Learn to say the word :longer T shows two books at different prices T: This book is cheaper than that book Learn the word:cheaper 2.Use the same way to learn another word:older 3.Sum up: A is/are + adjective comparative degree + than B Step3 Practice 1.PartE 1)Two students to discuss the pictures 2)Finish writing exercise Step4Consolidation 1)Make a situation and have a dialogue with their partners, 2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and read the dialogue, copy the new words ,and try to recite text

Unit9what is dongdong going to do?

Period 1

Teaching targets.1.The target of knowledge: 1)Learn these new words: turns,pick up,put dwon,shout at 2)Retell the story with the development order of a story 2.The targets of skills: To perceive the Simple Future Tense: be going to do To improve the ability of performing language comprehensively 3.The targets of emotion: To filter the education of loving nature and protecting animals Main points : To perceive the Simple Future Tense: be going to do Difficult point: To perceive the Simple Future Tense: be going to do Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record, picture Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.Quick response Teacher give an order ,the pupils take a response and do the actions T:We are going to play a game ,you are going to do as I ask you to ready? Put up your hands,put down your hands Turn left, turn right …

Step2 Presentation and drill 1.Lead in the new dialogue and learn the new words : T: Put down your hands ,your legs and listen to me.T does the actions ,help the pupils to understand the word T:Oh, bad luck!Can you help me pick them up? Ask a student to pick up the chalks

T: Look,he is picking up the chalks ,thanks!Learn to say the phrases: put down , pick up Listen and repeat Game—Simon says Step3 Fast reading and listening 1.Read the dialogue quickly ,then answer the following question T:Please read the passage as fast as you can ,you are going to answer the following questions Where are Lingling and Dongdong ? What is Dongdong going to do? 2.Listen and imitation Step4 Intensive reading Help the pupils to understand the sentence pattern:…ate most of the food ,leaving only a little for the smaller bird.1)Reading the dialogue carefully, then answer the following questions: What is Lingling looking at? What is Lingling going to do when she turns to look at Dongdong look at? Do you like Lingling ?Why ? 2)Listen and answer the questions 3)Finish Part C Step5 Consolidation Retell the story,according to the following form Lingling Looks at the monkey Is going to shout at Is going to take form…and scold Dongdong Is goig to pick up Is going to throw Is going to cry Estimation(评价)Homework: Listen and repeat the text ,copy the words and sentences Notes:

Period 2 Teaching targets.1)Can master and perform the new words and phrases 2)The simple future tense Main points : Master and perform the new words and phrases Difficult point: The simple future tense:be going to Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Sing a song Free talk Require the pupils(5)to come to the BB,act out the text(Dong Dong,Lingling,Monkey,Tiger,the narrator)…Dongdong is going to cry.He is going to put down the stone and say sorry to Lingling.Lingling is going to see the animals with Dongdong together …..Step2 Presentation and drill 1.Shows an umbrella ,and pretend to opening it T: What ‗s this ?It‘s an umbrella ,what am I going to do? Ss:You are going to open the umbrella.Shows a newspaper T:What‘s this?It‘s a newspaper.What am I going to do? Ss: You are going to read the newspaper.T:No,I‘m not going to read the newspaper,I am going to buy some meat,I am going to put the meat in the paper Learn to say the new words Play a game—Guess,guess,guess Step3 Practice 1.Part D Finish writing exercises ,(can discuss by groups)2.Require the pupils to practice with partners Step4 Consolidation Free talk(Look and tell a story)Picture1:Lili want to go through the street ,a dog is sitting near the shop Picture2:Lili is going to buy some meat Picture3:It‘s raining ,Lili is going to open the umbrella

Picture4:Lili finds the dog want to bite the meat ,she run home,and the dog run after her.2)Estimation 3)Homework: Draw comic strip ,tell a story with the simple future tense Notes:

Period 3 Teaching targets.1)Can master and perform the simple future tense:be going to 2)Can sing the rhyme Main points : Use the sentence pattern(be going to)to write sentneces Difficult point: Understand and sing the rhyme Teaching aids : cards ,tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Sing a song Game---Ask and answer The pupils do the actions ,and use the sentence pattern(be going to)What am I going to do?Teacher answer their questions Eg:S1:What am I going to do? T:You are going to… Step2 Presentation and drill Game---Guess,guess,guess Sentence pattern Is he /she going to…? Step3 Practice 1.PartE 1)Two students to discuss the pictures 2)Finish writing exercise Step4Consolidation Make a situation and have a dialogue with their partners,The Spring Festive is coming ,the pupils are talking what they are going to do.2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and read the dialogue

Discuss the actions for the Spring Festive

Unit10 Are you going to visit Anne?

Period 1 Teaching targets.1.The target of knowledge: 1)Learn these new words: stairs,follow,film.excited,huge Retell the story with the development order of a story Can use the sentence pattern: Are you going to…? 2.The targets of skills: To perceive the Simple Future Tense: Are you going to do sth? To improve the ability of performing language comprehensively Main points : To perceive the general question of the Simple Future Tense: Are you going to do sth.Difficult point: Retell the story Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record, picture Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.Sing a song Retell partA of Unit9 Step2 Presentation and drill 1.Lead in the new dialogue and learn the new words : T shows a card:stairs T:What are these? help the pupils to answer:They are stairs.Write down the word,explain the meaning and lead reading T looks like very happy T: Are you happy today? Ss:Yes,we are

T: I‘m very happy today,I‘m excited!because I‘m going to see a film.Learn to say the words: excited ,film Use the same way to learn the other words 2.Listen and repeat 3.Game—Magic eyes Lead the new sentence pattern T: Today is Friday ,What day is it tomorrow? Ss:Tomorrow is Saturday.T:What are you going to do?Are you going to see a film? Ss:Yes ,I‘m.Write down the sentence pattern,learn to say Step3 Fast reading and listening 1.Read the dialogue quickly ,then answer the following question T: Yesterday was a holiday,Lingling and Dongdong wanted to go out ,Dongdong followed her ,please tell me: What is she going to do? 2.Listen and imitation,require the pupils to master the difficult sentences Step4 Intensive reading Help the pupils to understand the sentence patterns 1)Reading the dialogue carefully 2)Finish Part C(Pair work)Step5 Consolidation Retell the story Estimation(评价)Homework: Listen and repeat the text ,copy the words and sentences Notes:

Period 2 Teaching targets.1)Can master and perform the new words and phrases 2)The simple future tense(READING AND WRITING)3)Can understand the Part D Main points : Master and perform the new words and phrases Difficult point: The simple future tense:be going to Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Sing a song

3.Use the cards to go over the words:stairs ,follow,film,excited, Require the pupils(5)to come to the BB,act out the text(Dong Dong,Lingling,Monkey,Tiger,the narrator)Step2 Presentation and drill 1.Shows a picture T: Where is this ?It‘s an amusement park, do you like playing there?Let‘s go and play.Points to the picture T:What‘s this?It‘s a roller-coaster,this is a merry-go –round.Learn to say the new words Play a game—Guess,guess,guess Step3 Practice 1.Part D Finish writing exercises ,(can discuss by groups)2.Require the pupils to practice with partners 3.Look at the picture and tell the story 4.Game—Ask and answer Step4 Consolidation Free talk(Look and tell a story)Situation:a foreigner come to Changsha,he is a stranger to the city,someday he wants to do shopping ,but he doesn‘t know where he would go,so he ask for a taxi driver 2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and tell a story with the simple future tense Notes:

Period 3 Teaching targets.1)Can describe the picture of partE 2)Can use the simple future tense to describe the future actions Main points : Can describe the picture of partE Difficult point: Can use the simple future tense to describe the future actions Teaching aids : cards ,tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Sing a song 3.Free talk(about the simple future tense)Step2 Presentation and drill Lead in the new situation T:I‘m going to the park this weekend.what‘s Lingling going to do this weekend? Requires the pupils to guess what is Lingling going to do this weekend,then show the picture :Lingling is swimming T:What‘s Lingling going to do this weekend? Ss:She is going to swimming.2.Use the same way to learn the other pictures,help the pupils to use:He/She is going to… Step3 Practice 1.PartE 1)Two students to discuss the pictures 2)Finish writing exercise 3)Game –Happy passing Step4Consolidation 1)Requires the pupils to survey what his/her friends is going to do this weekend, then choose some groups to give a report

Name Ride a bicycle See a film Play basketball Buy something Go to swimming …

Lingling Mary Ken …

2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and read the dialogue

Discuss the actions for the Spring Festive NOTES:

Unit11 When are we going to swimming?

Period 1 Teaching targets.1.The target of knowledge: 1)Learn these new words:bench,sand,dangerous,swimming suit 2)Understand and retell the story

3)Can use the sentence pattern: when are we going to do sth? 2.The targets of skills: To perceive the Simple Future Tense: when are we going to do sth? To improve the ability of performing language comprehensively Main points : To perceive the special question of the Simple Future Tense: When are we going to do sth.Difficult point: Retell the story Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record, picture etc Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Sing a song:The days of a week 3.Free talk: T:What are you going to do tomorrow? Ss:I‘m going to …

T:Are you going to …? …

Step2 Presentation and drill 1.Lead in the new dialogue and learn the new words and sentence pattern:

T:I‘m so happy today,because I received a letter from my best friendQiqi,she is in HainanIsland now.She sent me a photo,would you like to have a look? Show the photo T:Look!This is my friend what is she doing? Help the pupils to answer: She is sitting on the beach and playing sand.Write down the word,explain the meaning and lead reading Learn to say the words: beach, playing sand Use the same way to learn the other words:swimming suit and the topic sentence 2.Listen and repeat 3.Game—Loud and low voice 4.Lead the new sentence pattern Write down the sentence pattern,learn to say Step3 Fast reading and listening 1.Read the dialogue quickly ,then answer the following question T: Summer holiday is coming ,Lingling and Dongdong are going to go out with their friends What are Lingling and Dongdong going to do? What can‘t Dongdong do first?.Listen and imitation,require the pupils to master the difficult sentences Step4 Intensive reading Help the pupils to understand the sentence patterns 1)Reading the dialogue carefully 2)Finish Part C(Pair work)Step5 Consolidation Act out the dialogue ,choose a pupil to act as a narrator Estimation(评价)Homework: Listen and repeat the text ,copy the words and sentences Notes:

Period 2 Teaching targets.1)Can master and perform the new words :housewife ,stall, 2)The simple future tense :be gong to do sth 3)Can understand the Part D Main points : Master and perform the new words and phrases Difficult point: The simple future tense:be going to Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Sing a song

3.Use the cards to go over the words:beach,sand,dangerous,etc Step2 Presentation and drill 1.Part D T:What can you buy in the fish shop? What can you get from the bank? What can you get from the market? Do you like reading? Where can you get books? When are you going to the bookstore? Help the pupils to understand the questions ,then answer the questions Write down the sentence patterns ,then lead reading When are you going to … I‘m going to …at…

Pair work,to discuss the pictures then finish the exercises Act out the story Step3 Practice Free talk,according to the following form: where when who What The fruit shop After supper My mother Buy some fruits The bookstore This Saturday My brother Buysome books … … … …

Step4 Consolidation Situation: X-mas is coming ,your monitor is asking the arrangement of the party 2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and tell a story with the simple future tense Notes: Period 3 Teaching targets.1)Can describe the picture of partE 2)Can use the simple future tense to describe the future actions:be going to do sth Main points : Can use the simple future tense to describe the future actions Difficult point: Listening comprehension Teaching aids : cards ,tape ,record etc Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Sing a song:The days of a week Free talk(about the simple future tense)

T:Good morning ,are you going to have a computer lesson tomorrow? Ss:No,we are not.T:When are you going to have a computer lesson? Ss;We are going to have the computer lesson on Monday Step2 Presentation and drill 1.Show a photo T: Look at this photo!Last Sunday ,I played with my friends ,we took some photos at the basketball court ,we had a lot of fun Write down the phrase ,lead reading 2.Talk about the picture of Part E Step3 Practice 1.PartE 1)Two students to discuss the pictures 2)Finish writing exercise 3)Finish listening exercises Step4Consolidation Sunday … Monday Tuesday Wednesday …

1)a survey 2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and read the dialogue NOTES:

Unit12 Christmas

Period 1 Teaching targets.1.The target of knowledge: 1)Learn these new words: Christmas tree,decorations,stocking,etc 2)Understand and retell the story

3)Can understand and introduce the western traditional festival--Christmas 4)To cultivate the pupils‘ patriotism, to promote their culture knowleage ,to filter their interesting of learning English 2.The targets of skills: To improve the ability of performing language comprehensively Main points : Understand and repeat the text Difficult point: Performance

Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record,objects,etc Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Sing a song:Happy new year Step2 Presentation and drill 1.Lead in the new dialogue and learn the new words and sentence pattern: T: Hello,boys and girls,I‘m very happy today,a new friend is coming ,look

Give the music:A Merry Christmas!Ask a pupil to act as Santa Claus,teacher greet with him T: Hello, Santa Claus Nice to meet you!Snta: Nice to meet you ,too!(Stop the music)Help the pupils to know :Santa Claus!(Father Christmas)2.Put on the Christmas map T:Now ,I‘m Santa,hello,boy and girls ,nice to meet you!Ss: Hello,Santa,nice to meet you too!…

Learn to say the words: Christmas tree(card),stocking,presents 3.Listen and repeat Part A 4.Pair work:read the dialogue with partners Step3 Fast reading and listening 1.Read the dialogue quickly ,then answer the following question T: Just now we learned something zbout Christmas,do you want know more about it? Please read the text as quickly as you can and answer the following questions: Whis Father Christmas? What do people do during Christmas? 2.Listen and imitation,require the pupils to master the difficult sentences Step4 Intensive reading Help the pupils to understand the sentence patterns 1)Reading the dialogue carefully 2)Finish Part C(Pair work)Step5 Consolidation Act out the dialogue , choose a pupil to act as a narrator Estimation(评价)Homework: Listen and repeat the text Notes:

Period 2 Teaching targets.1)Can sing the song: A Merry Christmas

2)To improve the interesting of learning English through performace 3)Can understand the festival culture of traditional festival Main points : Sing the song Difficult point: Retell the text Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Sing a song

3.Use the cards to go over the words 4.Game—Little actor Step2 Presentation and drill 1.Part E Listen to the tape Learn to sing the song Listen and sing Performance Link the words to sentences Step4 Consolidation 1)Information 2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and tell a story with the simple future tense Notes: Period 3 Christmas Party

Unit13 I‘m as happy as a bird

Period 1 Teaching targets.1.The target of knowledge: 1)Learn these new words:carry,clever,underdtand,difficult,friendly 2)Understand and retell the story

3)Can use the sentence pattern: as…as 2.The targets of skills: To perceive the comparative degree of adjective: To improve the ability of performing language comprehensively Main points : Retell the story Difficult point: the structure:as..as Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record, picture etc Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Sing a song 3.Free talk Step2 Presentation and drill Lead in the new dialogue and learn the new words and sentence pattern: 1)T brings some books in the hand,and the books looks like too heavy to light T: Oh, the books are so heavy that I can‘t carry it.Who can carry for me?Who can help me? S1:Let me help you.T: Thank you ,you are so friendly

Write the words:carry ,friendly on the Bb,lead reading 2)Show some English readings T: S2,please read this story for us.S2:Sorry,I can‘t read the story.T: It doesn‘t matter ,this book is too difficult.Write down the word,explain the meaning and lead reading T: Who can read it? S3: Let me have a try.…

T: You are very clever,I feel very happy,and I think I am as happy as a bird,do you understand?

Write down the words on the Bb:clever,understand ,happy as a bird Write down the sentence pattern,learn to say 2.Listen and repeat Step3 Fast reading and listening 1.Read the dialogue quickly ,then answer the following question T: One day ,the children were free,Where did they go?What did they do?Please read the story quickly and see what the story is about? 2.Listen and imitation,require the pupils to master the difficult sentences Step4 Intensive reading Read the story again,discuss the following questions: Where were the children? What was Dongdong doing? What did he want to do? Did they need any help?Why? Did Dongdong speak to Peter? How did Dondong feel ? What kind of person do you think of Dongdong? Help the pupils to understand the sentence patterns Reading the dialogue carefully Listen and repeat Step5 Consolidation Retell the story,according to the following form: Dongdong Carry books The old man Not as strong as Get the book The young girl Not as tall as Understand the book Peter Not as clever as Estimation(评价)Homework: Listen and repeat the text

Tell the story for your family Notes:

Period 2 Teaching targets.1)Can master and perform the structure:as…as

Aprove the situation,to improve the pupils‘ ability of perform and arrange the language , to filter the pupils‘ aspirations of learning English Main points : Can master and perform the structure:as…as

Difficult point: Describle the things and persons with the comparative degree Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.Retell PartA Game –Guess,guess,guess Group1: S1:Is she a girl Ss:Yes,you are right S2: Is she tall? Ss:No,no,no S3: Is she short? Ss:Yes.S4: Is she thin? Ss:Yes.S5: Is she beautiful? Ss:Yes.S6:She is as happy as a bird.….Group2: …

Step2 Presentation and drill 1.Part D Pair work, ask the pupils to discuss T: Read the description carefully,discuss and find out how tall each child is.2.Finish the exercises Step4 Practice Situation: The first day of the new term , how did you feel?What did you help your teacher and classmates do? Did you show your writing tools? Please make a dialogue with your partners ,then act it out 2)Estimation 3)Homework: Make sentences with ―as…as‖ ve,they can live in t

l pattern:

ame?

Lead reading)w?

her grandma,Little Red Riding Hood is afraid of the wolf,and her grandma is afraid of the wooen answer my questions

ntences to..jumped out of …ran for help

Estimation(评价)Homework: Listen and repeat the text

Copy the new words Notes:

Period 2 Teaching targets.1)Can master and perform the structure:as…as

Aprove the situation,to improve the pupils‘ ability of perform and arrange the language , to filter the pupils‘ aspirations of learning English Main points : Can master and perform the structure:as…as

Difficult point: Describle the things and persons with the comparative degree Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.Retell PartA Game –Guess,guess,guess Group1: S1:Is she a girl Ss:Yes,you are right S2: Is she tall? Ss:No,no,no S3: Is she short? Ss:Yes.S4: Is she thin? Ss:Yes.S5: Is she beautiful? Ss:Yes.S6:She is as happy as a bird.….Group2: …

Step2 Presentation and drill 1.Part D Pair work, ask the pupils to discuss T: Read the description carefully,discuss and find out how tall each child is.2.Finish the exercises Step4 Practice Situation: The first day of the new term , how did you feel?What did you help your teacher and classmates do? Did you show your writing tools? Please make a dialogue with your partners ,then act it out 2)Estimation 3)Homework: Make sentences with ―as…as‖ Notes:

Period 3 Teaching targets.1)Can understand the new words: camel,fox,lion,bull,brave 2)Can use the adjectives:brave,clever,happy,strong,angry,quiet 3)Can write the sentences with‖as…as‖

Main points : Can write the sentences with‖as…as‖ Difficult point: Choose the references to compare things Teaching aids : cards ,tape ,record etc Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Warming up T: I can run, I can run as fast as a rabbit.I can climb, I can climb as quickly as a monkey I can jump , I can jump as far as a kangaroo I can swim , I can swim as freely as a fish Step2 Presentation and drill T: Do you like animals, what‘s your favorite animal?Why? Requires the pupils to talk about theirs favorite animal.Teacher writes down the adjectives

T: My favorite animals are samels(shows the pictures)they are brave,they can live in the desert,we call them ―a boat of the desert‖

T: Do you like fox?(show the picture)Foxes are very clever ….2.Finish the puzzle(Part E)Step3 Practice Game—Little Doctor Requires the pupils to say the animals‘ names Eg: The foxes are very clever The camels are very tall.The horses are very strong.The lions are very brave.…

2.Finish part F Step4Consolidation 1)Ask the pupils to investigate what‘s your friends‘ favorite animal 2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and read the dialogue NOTES:

第三篇:新版湘少版六年级上册英语教案

Unit one

Unit 1 What did you do during the holidays? Period 1

一、Teaching aims: 1.Enable the Ss listen, read, say and write the new words: learn words and sentences, play games, learn writing and practice listening.2.Enable the Ss be familiar with the past tense.3.Sentence: What did...do during the summer holidays?

二、Teaching emphasis: Enable the Ss listen, read, say and write the new ords and talk about the past events.三、Teaching difficulties: Enable the Ss be familiar with the past tense.四、Teaching tools: Tape, pictures

五、Teaching method Oral method

六、Teaching steps: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings and games.Simon says: word list-play, learn, write, talk, listen, do, have, go, take, read, speak, teach and holidays.2.Make a conversation with the Ss.T: Glad to see you again.Ss: Glad to see you too.T: What did you do during the summer holidays? Ss: I went to Hainan„ Step 2 Presentation and drill 1.Show the picture of “learn words and sentences”.T: This is a picture of Mingming during the summer holidays.What did he do? Ss: He is learning words and sentences.T: He is not doing it now.He learnt words and sentences during the summer holidays.2.Learn the other words in the same way.3.Read together.4.Little teacher.Step 3 Practice T: He learnt words and sentences.They played games.She learnt writing.He practised listening.(Action)learn words and sentences, play games, learn writing and practice listening„ 2.The Ss act and say.Listen to the tape of Part A and then answer these questions.What did Anne do during the summer holidays? What did Mingming do during the summer holidays? 3.Listen and repeat.4.Pair-works.5.Act it out.Step 4 Consolidation 1.Evaluation.2.Do Ex.3.Homework.Copy the new words.Design of the blackboard: Period 2

一、Teaching aims: 1.Enable the Ss listen, read and say the dialogue;2.Enable the Ss master the sentence pattern: What did you do during the holidays? 3.Enable the Ss master read the short passages and judge True or False.二、Teaching emphasis: Enable the Ss listen, read and say the dialogue;

三、Teaching difficulties: Enable the Ss master the sentence pattern: What did you do during the holidays?

四、Teaching tools: Tape, pictures

五、Teaching method Oral method

六、Teaching steps: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Act and say.1).(Action)learn words and sentences, play games, learn writing and practice listening„ 2).Tom: I played games.Ss: Tom played games Step 2 Presentation and drill 1.Listen to the tape and learn the Word Bank.What did you do during the holidays? I read many books.I visited my grandparents.I played games with my friends.Step 3 Practice 1.Listen to the tape and repeat.2.Pair-work.3.Group-work.Step 4 Let’s Read

1.Read the short passage and then judge True or Flase.2.Read the passage again and underline the key sentences.3.Check the answers.Step 5 Consolidation 1.Evaluation.Notes: 英语学习切不可盲目,周密有效的计划。英语基础对于英语学习至关重要,对英语基础不好的同学更应加强这一要求。

Period 3

一、Teaching aims: 1.Enable the Ss talk about their holidays.2.Enable the Ss and write down their holidays.二、Teaching emphasis: Enable the Ss describe their holidays.三、Teaching difficulties: Enable the Ss to talk about and write down their holidays

四、Teaching tools: Tape

五、Teaching method Oral method

六、Teaching steps: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Read Part A together.Step 2 Presentation and drill 1.Ask students to talk about their summer holidays and then let them finish Part E: write down your answers 2.Check the answer.3.Ask two Ss to talk about their answers.Step 3 Let’s Have Fun 1.Class work.Look at the pictures, describe Mingming’s and Anne’s holidays.2.Class work.describe your holidays.Step 4 Consolidation 1.Do Ex.Workbook 2.Evaluation.3.Homework.Revise 英语学习切不可盲目,周密有效的计划。同时老师要给学生明确各阶段的学习目标,并制定相应的措施来保证目标的实施,要加大督促检查的力度,并在此基础上进行总结。在教学过程中,应留意思想教育与知识教学互相渗透,寓思想素质教育于知识教育之中

Unit2 katie always gets up early

Period 1 Teaching targets.1. The target of knowledge: Learn these new words: wake up, make the bed, wave, I‘m late 2)Learn these sentences: sb do sth at some time(the third time)2. The targets of skills:

1)Can understand the four –skill words.2)Can understand the sentence structure.3)Can describe the other ‗s actions.(the third time)3.The targets of emotion: To form the health living habit Main points :The new words and sentences.Difficult point:sb do(does)sth at some time.Teaching method and Learning way: CAI Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Learn to sing a song-London Bridge is falling down 3.Use the cards to go over the words Game—Guess ,guess, guess 4.Retell the story—Unit 1 Step2 Presentation and drill 1.T : You‘re very good.You are all good pupils.And Katie ia a good pupil too.Everyone likes her.She is never late for school.She always gets up early every day.Then she makes bed.after breakfast, she waves her family goodbye.T says the sentences and does the actions to helps pupils to unders

tand the meanings.learn the new words Lead reading the words and check the results.According to the words ,sk some questions and requires pupils to answer the questions.T: Do you get up early everyday?… 2.Game –Patting flies.3.Leads reading the words,and requires the pupils to act as a little teacher,leads reading 4.Look and say: High and low voice Step3 Fast reading and listening Read the dialogue quickly ,then answer the following question What time does Katie‘s father leave for work?

T introduces the situation and requires the pupils to read the dialogue by themselves 2)Listen and imitation Step4 Intensive doing 1)Reading the dialogue carefully 2)Listen and repeat the dialogue 3)Retell the story ,check the resul

Period 2 Teaching targets.1)Consolidate these new words 2)Can master these sentence structure: sb do(does)sth every day 3)Can retell the story 2.The targets of emotion: To love the life.Main points :The new words and sentences.Difficult point: Can use the present time of the third person Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.sing a song

3.Use the cards to go over the words Game—Golden finger Say something about your daily life Step2 Presentation and drill Show the new words : always ,often , usually ,never Requires the pupils to read ,go over the words.Teacher explin the grammar for the pupils.Ask stuents to read the dialogue of Part A ,then the dtudents are required to draw line under the adv.Eg.Katie always get up early.Notes: always表示―老是,总是,一直‖与never相对 Never表示―永不,决不,从来没有‖ Often表示―常常,时常,通常‖ Usually表示―惯常地,通常地‖ Step3 Practice 1)Part D 1)ractice in pairs,according to the form to say something about Peter‘s day.2)Group work

3)Finish the hand writing ,then check the answers Step4 Consolidation always often usually never Makes breakfast for family Washes clothes in the morning Cooks dinner for the hildren ….1)Make a stuation and have a dialogue with their partners, choose some to act it out 2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and read the dialogue, copy the new words Notes: 要努力使基础知识转化为技能,要不断

提高英语的日常交际能力,力争做到听得懂、说得脱、读得畅、写得神。

Period 3 Teaching targets.1)Go over these four-skill word, text,grammar 2)Can finish Part E Main points : The new words and sentences

Difficult point: Can describe the other‘s actions ,make differences between ―always,never,often,usually‖ Teaching aids : cards ,tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Go over the four-skill words 3.Use the cards to go over the new dialogue ,and make sentences with ―always,never,often,usually‖ Step2 Presentation and drill 1.Explain the sentences for the class ,then requires the pupils to communicate with others ,according to the information in the form.2.Part E Listen to the tape and requires them to finish Part E,check the answers.3.Listen to tape and follow it

4.Requires the pupils to find the answers ,say their answers first ,then write down on the book.Step3 Consolidation 1)Make a situation and have a dialogue with their partners, choose some to act it out 2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and read the dialogue, copy the new words ,and try to recite text

Notes: 学生在学习中将会碰到许多困难,因此,信心十足,目标明确是成功地进行英语教学的一个重要因素

Unit3 I like my computer

Period 1 Teaching targets.1.The target of knowledge: 1)Learn these new words: underwater world , picnic, library,science story 2)Learn these sentences: sb do sth at some time(the third time)2.The targets of skills:

1)Can understand the four –skill words.2)Can understand the sentence structure: the imperative sentence Can describe person‘s willing with the imperative sentence 3.The targets of emotion: Can describe person‘s willing with the imperative sentence Main points :The new words and the imperative sentence.Difficult point: Let‘s do sth.Teaching method and Learning way: CAI Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Free talk: say something about their daily life Step2 Presentation and drill 1.T : Hello ,boys and girls.I don‘t feel happy today ,can you guess why? Requires the pupils to guess the reasons.Ss: …

T :Let me tell you , My new watch missing yesterday(show a watch)I want to go to the library to read the science stories ,but my friend told me it was not open.I want to the park for a pinic,but my friend wanted to go to the shopping center.Say the words and sh

ow the cards ,helps pupils to understand the meanings.learn the new words Lead reading the words and check the results.2.Game –Patting flies.3.Leads reading the words,and requires the pupils to act as a little teacher, leads reading Step3 Fast reading and listening 1.Read the dialogue quickly ,then answer the following question Where did the go?

T introduces the situation and requires the pupils to find the answer.2)Listen and imitation Step4 Intensive doing 1)Reading the dialogue carefully,then finish the form pople Suggestions Peter Go to the Underwater World

Ling ling Go to the park for a picnic/go to the shopping center Mingming Go to the library Anne Go to the beach Results Too late to go out 2)Listen and repeat the dialogue 3)According to the form,retell the story Finish patC ,then listen and repeat

Step5 Consolidation Require the pupils to act it out Estimation Homework: Listen and repeat the text ,copy the words and sentences Notes: 六年级英语学习主要是以深化基础知识为主。我想,在学习中要分阶段学习,在第一阶段要以大纲为标准,以课本为依据,按照课本的编排顺序,每一册、每一单元、每一课都要细致地学习,力求基础,全面。所谓基础,是指学习要抓住―三基‖,即基础知识、基本技能和基本解题方法。

Period 2 Teaching targets.1)Can master these sentence structure: the imperative sentence 2)Can retell the story 2.The targets of emotion: To love the life.Main points :The new words and sentence structure.Difficult point: Can use the imperative sentence Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process:

Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.sing a song

3.Use the cards to go over the words Game—Golden finger Look at the picture and retell the dailogue Step2 Presentation and drill 1.T:Ok,you ‗ve done a good job.today is very hot,I feel very thirsty.Are you thirsty now?I want to have some water Hmm,I‘m not thirsty.But I don‘t have breakfast ,I feel hungry… Lead the pupils to say :Let‘s go to the hospital!Teacher explin the words for the pupils.Lead reading :sick,hungry ,hot,thirsty,bored 2.Do and say(Game)Game—Making friend Hot thirsty bored hungry happy sick Restaurant swimming pool , cinema park hospital cafe Step3 Practice 1.Part D 1)Finish Pard D 2)Group work: Have a competition

Put the cards into a box ,requires pupils to choose one card ,and

make a sentence Eg:hot I feel hot ,I want to the swimming pool Step4 Consolidation Make a stuation and have a dialogue with their partners, choose some to act it out Discuss where do you want to go ,take a note 2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and read the dialogue, copy the new words , recite the text

Period 3 Teaching targets.1)Go over these four-skill word, text,grammar 2)Can finish Part E,F Main points : To consolidate the grammar Difficult point: To improve the ability of speaking Teaching aids : cards ,tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Sing an English song

Game –Guess,guess,guess Choose a card and do the action, requires pupils to guess Step2 Presentation and drill T: I want to buy some milk ,where can I go? S: You can go to the supermarket T: I wan to see a football game ,where can I go? S: You can go to the stadium …

Have a free talk with their partners Game—Quick response T says the name of the place ,requires the pupils to say the activity which we can have Eg: S1:Cinema S2:See a film …

Step3 Consolidation 1)Make a situation and have a dialogue with their partners, choose some to act it out 2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and read the dialogue, copy the new words ,and try to recite text

Notes: 查缺补漏后,学生的基础知识已比较全

面、系统、完整。但是对于重点内容还要以专题的形式进行练习,以便于进一步突出重点。同时要强化易错点,为达到这一目的,教师要选取高质量的模拟练习题进行练习,然后进行讲评。

Unit4 The Mid-Autumn Festive is coming

Period 1 Teaching targets.1.The target of knowledge: Learn these new words: egg yolk , grapes, tea , mooncake 2)Learn to tell the story.2.The targets of skills: 1)Can understand the four –skill words.2)Can tell the story and understand some traditional festive culture 3.The targets of emotion: To filter the education of east-west culture ,to encourage the interesting of study

Main points :Understand the story and retell it.Difficult point: Retell the story.Teaching method and Learning way: CAI Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Sing a song.3.Retell or act out the Unit2 Step2 Presentation and drill 1.Lead in the new dialogue and learn the new words : mooncake , eggyolk ,grapes

T: I‘m hungry ,I want to eat this after class.Do you know what it is?

Lead the pupils to answer like this: It‘s a mooncake

Write the word and lead reading : mooncake , the Mid-Autumn Festive , eggyolk , grapes Lead reading the words and check the results.2.Game –Magic eyes.3.Game –Brain storn Step3 Fast reading and listening 1.Read the dialogue quickly ,then answer the following question How could Chang‘e fly to the moon?

2.Listen and imitation Step4 Intensive reading 1)Reading the dialogue carefully,then answer the following questions: Why did Chang‘e take the magic medicine? What did shi bring with her to the moon? Was Chang‘e happy on the moon?

How did people celebrate Mid—Autumn Festive? 2)Listen and repeat the dialogue 3)Choose one picture to retell the story Step5 Consolidation Show the picture about the story ,and give them the key words ,retell the story Estimation Homework: Listen and repeat the text ,copy the words and sentences Period 2 Teaching targets.1)Can master these words and phrases: shall,except ,each other 2)Canact out the story 2.The targets of emotion: To understand the festive culture of traditional festive

Main points :The new words and sentence structure.Difficult point: Can act out the story Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Use the cards to go over the words

3.Look at the picture and retell the dialogue,have a match Step2 Presentation and drill T put an ornament of Chang‘e

T: I want to fly to the moon,I shall take this medicine Help pupils to understand the meaning

T: I feel so lonely here.There is no one except the rabbit and me.I miss my husband.We miss each other very much.2.Learn to say the new words 3.Require the class to estimate the teacher‘s performance 4.Read the story ,then act out the story(three pupils as a group)Step3 Practice 1.Game--Brain storm Game—Little actor Step4 Consolidation 1)Make a stuation and have a dialogue with their partners, choose

some to act it out Discuss where do you want to go ,take a note 2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and read the dialogue, copy the new words , recite the text

Notes: 好的讲评应该在讲评之前认真地分析,找出学生的错点,并在课堂上讲评时抓住这些错点,帮助学生弄清出错的原因,使学生及时纠正错误。

Period 3 Teaching targets.1)Go over these four-skill words Can sing the song:Do Re Mi To cultivate the pupils‘ patriotism, to promote their culture knowleage

Main points : To consolidate the words and can sing the song :Do Re Mi Difficult point: Read and understand the text ,to grasp the divergence of east-west culture

Teaching aids : cards ,tape ,record Teaching Process:

Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Sing an English song Game – Make friends Choose a card put the cards to the stickers Step2 Presentation and drill 1.T: I want to buy some milk ,where can I go? S: You can go to the supermarket T: I wan to see a football game ,where can I go? S: You can go to the stadium …

2.Have a free talk with their partners 3.Game—Quick response Step3 Consolidation 1)Make a situation and have a dialogue with their partners, choose some to act it out 2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and read the dialogue, copy the new words ,and try to recite text

Notes: 无论是开始复习的夯实基础阶段,还是构建知识网络、归纳基本方法及技巧阶段,都要在立足于课本的基础上进行。但同时,也要精选有典型性和针对性的资料,这样有利于学生把握解题方法和解题规律。

Unit5 It will be sunny and cool tomorrow

Period 1 Teaching targets.1.The target of knowledge: 1)Learn these new words:living room,phone,loudly,noisly,quietly Learn to tell the story.2.The targets of skills: 1)Can understand the four –skill words.2)Can use the adv.skillfully 3.The targets of emotion: To filter the education of good-manners ,to help students to form the habit of good behavior Main points :Understand the story and retell it.Difficult point: Retell the story.Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Sing a song.Do Re Mi 3.Retell or act out the Unit4 Step2 Presentation and drill 1.Lead in the new dialogue and learn the new words : living room,phone,loudly,noisily,quietly T: Who are they?They are my friends,Lingling and Dongdong,Do you know where they were yesterday?They were in my home.T describes the situation vividly, lead the pupils to understand with exaggerational countenance and objects.T:…

Write the word and lead reading the new words,explain the words for the students.Lead reading the words and check the results.2.Game –Look and say(Consolidate the adv.)Step3 Fast reading and listening 1.Read the dialogue quickly ,then answer the following question What ‗s the weather like today?

Why can‘t Mrs.Chen hear herfriend on the phone?

2.To help the pupils to understand the word: heavily

3.Listen and imitation(Ask the pupils to find the adv.And draw out)Step4 Intensive reading 1)Reading the dialogue carefully,then answer the following questions: Who is Mrs.Chen talking to? What are the children doing in the living room? How is Dongdong playing? Who is talking louding? 2)Listen and repeat the dialogue 3)Choose one picture to retell the story Step5 Consolidation Retell the story,finish the following form it Rain heavily outside Lingling and Dongdong Play noisily in the living room Mrs.Chen Talk not clearly on the phone Dongdong Play noisily Lingling Talk loudly Lingling and dongdong Play quietly in the bedroom Estimation Homework: Listen and repeat the text ,copy the words and sentences

Notes: 单靠唱歌游戏不能培养学生持久的兴趣。新鲜劲儿一过,孩子们就会厌倦。所以,唱歌游戏应该作为初中学生学习英语语言知识、技能的一些手段,而不是培养兴趣的手段

Period 2 Teaching targets.1)Can master and perform the adv.:slowly,quickly,softly 2)Can act out the story 2.The targets of emotion: To filter their interestings of learning English Main points :The new words and sentence structure.Difficult point: Can act out the story Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Use the cards to go over the words 3.Game—Quick response 4.Look at the picture and retell the dialogue,have a match

Step2 Presentation and drill Countiue the game,lead in the new words T walks slowly, guides the pupils to describe the teacher‘s action:The teacher is walking slowly Help pupils to understand the meaning,learn to say the words 2.Learn to say the other new words:softly,speak;Play a game—Singing different tune T: Speak slowly Ss:Speak quickly …… Step3 Practice 1.Part D Devide into groups,requires the groups to describe the pictures orally.Finish writing exercises ,(can discuss by groups)Step4 Consolidation 1)Free talk(The teacher introduce herself in English with different speaking speed ,to edify the students to express their willings politely)2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and read the dialogue, copy the new words , r

ecite the text

Period 3 Teaching targets.1)Go over these four-skill words 2)Can advance the ability of performing language comprehensively 3)Can enhance the interestings of learning English Main points : To consolidate the words

Difficult point: Read and understand the text ,to grasp the divergence of east-west culture

Teaching aids : cards ,tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Sing a song 3.Go over the words Requires threestudents to play game,one puts up a word(verb),another put up a word(adv.),the others make a sentence with the two words 4.Free talk and performance Step2 Presentation and drill PartE

T points to the Mrs.Zhao T: Who is she? Ss:She is Mrs.Zhao T: What is she doing? Answer: She is dancing happily 2.Use the same way to learn another words:politely,carefully 2.Have a free talk with their partners 3.Game—Quick response Step3 Practice Requires the students to express :what is..doing PartF T:What are they doing ? 3.Listen and sing Step4Consolidation Make a situation and have a dialogue with their partners, choose some to act it out Situation: one morning ,you and your friend go to the park,you see many people are doing morning exercises ,you are talking about it 2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and read the dialogue, copy the new words ,and try to recite text Notes: 目前在小学的英语教学中,不要求学生

掌握词汇,而只要求学生能根据提示或图片说出该单词,其本质无非是要学生们死记硬背,鹦鹉学舌。由于学生们没有相应的读音规则训练,不熟悉词汇的拼写规则,单词的音、形、意三者不能有效的结合在一起,因而导致了单词记忆的困难,Unit6 I will bring a big bottle of orange juice

Period 1 Teaching targets.1.The target of knowledge: Learn these new words: week,worried,scared,measure,weigh, Heavy,light 2)Can understand and retell the text 2.The targets of skills: To improve the skills of listening ,speaking ,reading and writing To improve the ability of performing language comprehensively 3.The targets of emotion: To filter the physique education Main points :Understand the story and retell it.Difficult point: Retell the story ,the method of special question Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Perform the song :Row your boat Use the cards to go over the words Game—Magic eye Game—What‘s missing 4.Retell or act out the Unit4 Step2 Presentation and drill 1.Lead in the new dialogue and learn the new words : week, worried, scared, measure, weigh, Heavy, light T show a phote of baby(a student‘s phote).T:Look,he is one of our classmate.He looked very weak Write the word and lead reading the new word ,explain the words for the students.T: his mother measured him,and he was only 90centimetres,his mother weighed him,he wad only 12 kilogrammers.Use the same way to learn the other words Lead reading the words and check the results.Show another photo

T: Look,he grows fast.Who is he? Do you know?(point out the pupil)T: Is he light now? Ss: No ,he is heavy Learn the new words,lead reading the topic sentence and the words.3.Game –Look and say(Consolidate the adv.)Step3 Fast reading and listening 1.Read the dialogue quickly ,then answer the following question T: This is Peter ,he is weak,his mother is worried about him,what‘s the matter with him?Let‘s read the text quickly and try to answer How did Peter feel when he saw the doctor? Was the doctor friendly?what did he do? 2.To help the pupils to understand the word: scared 3.Listen and imitation(Ask the pupils to find the adv.And draw out)

Step4 Intensive reading 1)Reading the dialogue carefully, hen answer the following questions: Where did Peter go? Why did Peter go there? How old was he? How tall(heavy)was he?

2)Listen and answer the questions 3)Choose one picture to retell the story Step5 Consolidation Retell the story,finish the following form Estimation(评价)Estimate the performance of the pupils‘, conform and encourage,to filter their potential of learning English Homework: Listen and repeat the text ,copy the words and sentences Notes: 在小学英语的教学中,因为课文的简单易懂,所含的信息量少的缘故,很多中学英语教师忽视了文化对语言的影响,而导致了一些语言情景的不真实,和虚假的语言的产生。

Period 2 Teaching targets.1)Can master and perform the sentence structure 2)Can improve the skills of learning English 3)Can further the interestings of learning English 2.The targets of emotion: To filter their interestings of learning English

Main points :To master the special question of questioning the other‘s basic situation

Difficult point:To improve the ability of performing language comprehensively Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Sing a song:Row your boat 3.Look at the picture and retell the dialogue,have a match Step2 Presentation and drill Introduce a new friend T:Today ,I‘llintroduce you a new friend,please ask him some quedtions.ok? Ss:OK!T:My name is Sun Wukong Ss:How old are you ? T:I‘m very old.Ss:…

2.Play a game—Quick renponse Step3 Practice 1.Part D

Devide into groups,requires the groups to describe the pictures orally.Finish writing exercises ,(can discuss by groups)Step4 Consolidation 1)Free talk(The teacher introduce herself in English with different speaking speed ,to edify the students to express their willings politely)2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and read the dialogue, copy the new words , recite the text

Period 3 Teaching targets.1)Go over these four-skill words 2)Can advance the ability of performing language comprehensively 3)Can enhance the interestings of learning English Main points : To consolidate the words

Difficult point: Read and understand the text ,to grasp the divergence of east-west culture

Teaching aids : cards ,tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up

1.Greetings.2.Sing a song 3.Go over the words Requires threestudents to play game,one puts up a word(verb),another put up a word(adv.),the others make a sentence with the two words 4.Free talk and performance Step2 Presentation and drill PartE T points to the Mrs.Zhao T: Who is she? Ss:She is Mrs.Zhao T: What is she doing? Answer: She is dancing happily 2.Use the same way to learn another words:politely,carefully 2.Have a free talk with their partners 3.Game—Quick response Step3 Practice Requires the students to express :what is..doing PartF T:What are they doing ? 3.Listen and sing

Step4Consolidation 1)Make a situation and have a dialogue with their partners, 2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and read the dialogue, copy the new words ,and try to recite text Notes:英语教师的教学重点是放在教学内容,教学大纲和考试形式上呢,还是将教学注重点转移到学生的性格、兴趣、情绪等方面的培养和控制 这是,现代教育思想转变的重大原则问题。

Unit7 What can I do?

Period 1 Teaching targets.1.The target of knowledge: 1)Learn these new words:foolishi,bull,horn,kill,rbbed,idea,ugly Learn to tell the story.2.The targets of skills: 1)Can understand the four –skill words.2)Can use the sentence structure:These horns are too big to expres

s the feature of the things 3.The targets of emotion: To educate the pupils not to believe bad-man easily Main points :Understand the story and use the sentence structure:These horns are too big to express the feature of the things Difficult point: Retell the story.Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Sing a song.Row your boat Game—Making friends Teacher puts the word cards on the Bb,requires the students to collocate into suitable phrases Beatuful, fat, tiger, pig, squirrel, tall, elephant, bird, strong, big, giraffe, small, monkey, naughty Step2 Presentation and drill Learn the new words:kill and foolish 1)Show a picture,a little with a bat in her hand T: What does she want to do? Help the pupils to answer like this:She wants to kill the fly.Write down the word and lead reading

T:Can she kill the fly? Ss:No,she can‘t ,she is foolish

Write the word and lead reading the new words,explain the words for the students.Lead reading the words and check the results.2.Use the same way to learn the other words: bull, horn Step3 Fast reading and listening T: What do you think of the horns Ss: They are small.T: Yes, they are small, they are too small for the bull, Why are the bull‘s horns so small?

2.Read the dialogue quickly , then answer the following question Why are the bull‘s horns so small?

3.To help the pupils to understand the word: heavily 4.Listen and imitation Step4 Intensive reading 1)Reading the dialogue carefully,then answer the following questions: Where was the bull? What did the lion wan to do to the bull? What the lion say to the bull? What did the bull do? 2)Listen and repeat the dialogue

Step5 Consolidation Retell the story,finish the following form(six elements of a narration)time Long,long again place In a field characters A lion and a bull reason The lion was hungry course the lion wants to eat the bull the horns are too big rubbed his horns against the tree smaller than the lion‘s ears

result The lion jumped on the bull and killed it Homework: Listen and retell the text ,copy the words and sentences

Period 2 Teaching targets.1)Can master and perform the adv.: too,just 2)Can use the adv.:too and just to discuss things 2.The targets of emotion: To filter their interestings of learning English Main points : Can use the adv.:too and just to discuss things Difficult point: To perceive the structure of sentence pattern:They ar

e too small Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.Game—Linked heart T showa some words(foolish,bull,kill,rubbed,horns,idea)choose two pupils to take one word ,and remember in the heart ,the other pupils to guess which word the student choose Free talk

T:Are the bull‘s horns too big? Ss:No, they aren‘t

T:Why did the lion say that the bull‘s horns are too big? Ss:Because the lion wanted to kill the bull ….4.Look at the picture and retell the story Step2 Presentation and drill PartD Lead in the new dialogue,learn the sentence pattern T:Yseaterday was my birthday,my father /mother/husband just came back from Beijing,he/she bought some clothes for me,look,here they are(show a clothes)Doyou think it is ok for me?I don‘t think so,I think it is too big for me.Do you think so? Learn to say :It is too big T:Look ,what do you think of this one? Ss:It‘s too small

T: Yes ,I think so,I can‘t wear id ,it is too small.(show another one)T:Look this one ,what do you think of this one? Ss:It‘s just right for you Learn to say this sentence:It‘s just right for you.3:Finish partC Play a game—Singing different tune Step3 Practice 1.Requires the pupils to make sentences with:it is too… T writes down the pupils‘ sentences

Clean one part of the sentences,ask pupils to add the last part KING OF REMEMBER Step4 Consolidation Free talk

Situation:MissLi is doing shopping in a supermarket ,she is satisfied with a sweater,she wants to try it one.2)Estimation 3)Homework: Listen and read the dialogue, copy the new words , r

ecite the text

Notes: 在课堂教学中英语教师要十分尊重学生,注意激励学生,关注学生学习过程。在当前“减负”工作中,英语教师尤其要注意体察学生在课堂上的心理感受,亲近学生,使学生喜爱英语教师和英语课,从而提高英语课堂教学的效益。

Period 3 Teaching targets.1`)To practice the usage of too 2)Can advance the ability of listening 3)Can enhance the interestings of learning English Main points : To practice the usage of too Difficult point: Understand a story by listening the story Teaching aids : cards ,tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Sing a song 3.Free talk and performance Step2 Presentation and drill

T shows a jacket T: Can you wear this jacket? Ss:No,I can not.It‘s too small Write down the dialogue S1:Can you wear the jacket S2:No,I can not ,it‘s too small.Can you wear this pyjamas? Step3 Practice PartF Pair work,discuss the pictures,finish the exercise The bos is 500kg,I can‘t lift it,It is too heavy I can not wear this pair of trousers.They are too long.I can‘t drink this tea,it‘s too hot

The toy car is 500yuan ,I can‘t buy it ,it‘s too expensive Step4Consolidation 1.PartF Look and answer the questions What do you learn from picture4 What do you learn from picture6 What do you learn from picture7 Listen and arrenage 2.Retell the story 3.Homework: Listen and read the dialogue, copy the new words ,an

d try to recite text

Notes: 学会英语,不但多了一对耳朵,一双眼睛,和一条舌头,甚至是多了一个头脑!因为语言是人类思维的工具,认识世界的工具,掌握一种语言也即掌握了一种观察和认识世界的方法和习惯。

Unit8 We shouldn‘t waste water

Period 1 Teaching targets.1.The target of knowledge: 1)Learn these new words:garden ,hole,pleased,small,bigger,angry 2)Can understand and retell the text

2.The targets of skills: To improve the usage of adjective comparative degree To improve the ability of performing language comprehensively 3.The targets of emotion: To educate the pupils not to bully the small and weak Main points : To improve the usage of adjective comparative degree Difficult point: Understand the sentence pattern:…ate most of the food ,leaving only a little for the smaller bird Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record,picture Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Sing the song :Row your boat Step2 Presentation and drill 1.Lead in the new dialogue and learn the new words : 1)T show a picture of a garden T:Look,what ‗s this ? Ss:It‘s a garden

Learn to say the word:garden 2)T points to the hole T:Look,what ‗s this ?

Ss:It‘s a hole

Learn to say the word:hole 3)T:Why are the birds looking at the hole? Encourage the pupils to elaborate their imagination,answer the question.Use the same way to learn the other words:smaller ,bigger Lead reading the words and check the results.4)T: Is he angry? Ss: Yes ,he is.Learn the new words,lead reading the topic sentence and the words.Step3 Fast reading and listening 1.Read the dialogue quickly ,then answer the following question Whose singing is louder ? Whose singing does the girl like better? 2.Listen and imitation Step4 Intensive reading Help the pupils to understand the sentence pattern:…ate most of the food ,leaving only a little for the smaller bird.1)Reading the dialogue carefully, then answer the following questions: Where did the birds live? What did the two birds look like?

What happened to the smaller birds? Who gave food to the birds? 2)Listen and answer the questions 3)Finish Part C Step5 Consolidation Retell the story,finish the following form TIME Long,long again PLACE In a garden CHARACTER A smaller bird,a bigger bird,a girl REASON …… COURSE …….RESULT …… Estimation(评价)Require the pupils to talk about how to not to bully the small and weak ,link with their reality

Homework: Listen and repeat the text ,copy the words and sentence

Period 2 Teaching targets.1)Can master and perform the form of the adjective comparative degree

2)Can use the adjective comparative degree to compara two things Main points : Use the adjective comparative degree to compara two things Difficult point: The form of the adjective comparative degree Teaching aids : cards, tape ,record Teaching Process: Step 1 Warming up 1.Greetings.2.Sing a song

3.Look at the picture and retell the text:the horns are too big Step2 Presentation and drill 1.Requires the pupils to come to the Bb(one is thin,one is fat)T: S1 is fatter than S2,S2 is thinner thanS1 Learn to say the new words:thinner ,fatter Requires the pupils to come to the Bb(one is taller,one is shorter)T: S1 is shorter than S2,S2 is taller thanS1 Learn to say the new words: taller ,shorter 2.Play a game—Quick renponse Step3 Practice 1.Part D Finish writing exercises ,(can discuss by groups)2.Require two pupils to come to the Bb,ask the other to describe t

第四篇:湘少版六年级英语教案

Unit 1: The children are playing in the park Content of courses: textbook P1-4 workbook P1-4 Teaching aims and demands:

1.Learn the words & phrase: swing slide bench bark chain bite stone.2.Can master the sentence ” „ is v+ing” Teaching methods: games, reading, action, etc.Period I Content of courses: textbook P2 Part B Teaching aims and demands:

1.Be able to master the words & phrase: swing slide bench bark chain bite stone.Educational affiliations: textbook, tape, tape-recorder, and word cards.Teaching-learning process: Step 1 Warm-up activity

1.Greeting..2.Let’s play: Look and guess: What is it? Step 2 Presentation & drill

1.Learn to say: swing T draws a swing on Bb and help Ss understand the meaning.Read the sentence after T.2.Learn to say: slide T draws a slide on Bb and help Ss understand the meaning.Read the sentence after T.Learn to say: bench bark chain bite stone in the same way.3.Drill.⑴T shows the pictures and Ss say the words.⑵T shows the pictures quickly and Ss say the words.⑶A guessing game.4.Open the books at Page 2, listen to tape and read after it.Step

3.Practice

1.Practice in four.Ss play the cards.2.Listen & act.Step

4.Consolidation Period Ⅱ Content of courses: textbook Part A Part C Teaching aims and demands:

1.Be able to understand and tell the story.Educational affiliations: textbook, tape, tape-recorder, word cards.Teaching-learning process: Step 1 Warm-up activity

1.Exchange greetings.2.Sing a song we’ve learned last term together.Step 2 Presentation & drill

1.Lead-in.T shows the picture of Part A.T says, “The children are playing in the park.Listen to the tape.What are they talking about?” T writes the sentence on Bb and help Ss understand the meaning.Read the sentence after T.2.Ss talk about the picture.3.Drill.⑴T shows the pictures and Ss rearrange them.⑵T shows the pictures and Ss tell the story.⑶A guessing game.4.Open the books at Page 1, listen to the tape and read after it.2.Ss practice in four.3.A game??A competition among groups.Step

4.Consolidation Step

1.Draw your favorite things and talk about them.Teacher’s notes2 Period III Content of courses: textbook P3 Part D&E Teaching aims and demands:

1.Be able to read and write the sentence ” „ is v+ing” Educational affiliations: textbook, tape, tape-recorder, word cards.Teaching-learning process: Step 1 Warm-up activity

1.Exchange greetings.2.Sing a song we’ve learned last term together.Step 2 Practice

1.Lead-in.T shows the picture of Part D.T says, “People are doing something today.Look at the pictures.What are they doing?”

2.Pair work.Look at pictures.Describe what each person is doing.3.Write sentences about 5 of the above pictures.e.g.The boy is brushing his teeth.4.T writes the sentence on Bb and help Ss understand the meaning.Read the sentence after T.5.Ss describe the pictures.6.Open the books at Page 3, Ss write the sentences on the book.Step

3.Learn to sing London Bridge Step

4.Consolidation Teacher’s notes: Unit 2 : Katie always gets up early.Content of courses: textbook P5-8workbook P5-8 Teaching aims and demands:

5.Learn the words & phrase: wake up/ make the bed/ wave/ I’m late.6.Canuse the words always/ often/ usually/ never to describe the activities.Teaching methods: games, reading, action, etc.Period I Content of courses: textbook P6 Part B Teaching aims and demands:

1.Be able to master the words & phrase: wake up/ make the bed/ wave/ I’m late.Educational affiliations: textbook, tape, tape-recorder, and word cards.Teaching-learning process: Step 1 Warm-up activity

1.Greeting..2.Let’s play: Look and guess: What is it? Step 2 Presentation & drill

1.Learn to say: swing T draws a swing on Bb and help Ss understand the meaning.Read the sentence after T.2.Learn to say: wave T waves the arm and help Ss understand the meaning.Read the word after T.Learn to say: wake up/ make the bed/ I’m late.in the same way.7.Drill.⑴T shows the pictures and Ss say the words.⑵T shows the pictures quickly and Ss say the words.⑶A guessing game.8.Open the books at Page 6, listen to the tape and read after it.Step

3.Practice

1.Practice in four.Ss play the cards.2.Listen & act.Step

4.Consolidation Teacher’s notes: Period II Content of courses: textbook Part A Part C Teaching aims and demands:

1.Be able to understand and tell the story.Educational affiliations: textbook, tape, tape-recorder, word cards.Teaching-learning process: Step 1 Warm-up activity

1.Exchange greetings.2.Sing a song we’ve learned last term together.Step 2 Presentation & drill

1.Lead-in.T shows the picture of Part A.T says, ”This is Katie’s Day.Listen to the tape.What dose she do?” T writes the sentence on Bb and help Ss understand the meaning.Read the sentence after T.2.Ss talk about the picture.3.Drill.⑴T shows the pictures and Ss rearrange them.⑵T shows the pictures and Ss tell the story.5 ⑶A guessing game.4.Open the books at Page 5, listen to the tape and read after it.Step

3.Practice

1.Put a tick if the sentences are correct or a cross if they are wrong.()Katie always gets up at six o’clock..()Katie always watches her face at 6:15 am.()Katie’s family often has breakfast at 6:45 am.()Sally always goes to the breakfast table on time.()Katie’s father usually waves them goodbye.2.Ss practice in four.3.A game??A competition among groups.Step

4.Consolidation

1.Draw your favorite things and talk about them.Teacher’s notes: Period III Content of courses: textbook P3 Part D&E Teaching aims and demands:

1.Be able to read and write the sentence with correct words: always/ often/ usually/ never.Educational affiliations: textbook, tape, tape-recorder, word cards.Teaching-learning process: Step 1 Warm-up activity

1.Exchange greetings.2.Sing a song we’ve learned last term together.Step 2 Practice

7.Lead-in.T shows the chart of Part D.T says, “Look at the chart.Take turns to tell each other about Peter’s activities.”

8.Pair work.Look at chart.Describe Peter’s activities.9.Make sentences about own activities..10.T writes the sentence on Bb and help Ss understand the meaning.Read the sentence after T.5.Open the books at Page 3, Ss write the sentences on the book

6.Look and write.Mrs LI is a busy housewife.Look at the chart of her activities below.Then write suitable answers in the blanks.Step

4.Consolidation Teacher’s notes: Unit 3: Let’s go to the Underwater World.Content of courses: textbook P9-12workbook P9-12 Teaching aims and demands: Learn the words & phrase: picnic, library, watch, science story Can master the sentence ” Let’s go to „.” Teaching methods: games, reading, action, etc.Period I Content of courses: textbook P10 Part B Teaching aims and demands:

1.Be able to master the words: picnic, library, watch, science story Educational affiliations: textbook, tape, tape-recorder, and word cards.Teaching-learning process: Step 1 Warm-up activity

1.Greeting.2.Let’s play: Look and guess: What is it? Step 2 Presentation & drill

1.Learn to say: picnic T help Ss understand the meaning.Read the word after T.2.Learn to say: library T help Ss understand the meaning.Read the word after T.Learn to say: watch science story in the same way.9.Drill.⑴T shows the pictures and Ss say the words.⑵T shows the pictures quickly and Ss say the words.⑶A guessing game.10.Open the books at Page 10, listen to the tape and read after it.Step

3.Practice

1.Practice in four.Ss play the cards.2.Listen & act.8 Period II Content of courses: textbook Part A Part C Teaching aims and demands:

1.Be able to understand and tell the story.Educational affiliations: textbook, tape, tape-recorder, word cards.Teaching-learning process: Step 1 Warm-up activity

1.Exchange greetings.2.Sing a song we’ve learned last term together.Step 2 Presentation & drill

1.Lead-in.T shows the picture of Part A.T says, “The children are talking.Listen to the tape.What are they talking about?” T writes the sentence on Bb and help Ss understand the meaning.Read the sentence after T.2.Ss talk about the picture.3.Drill.⑴T shows the pictures and Ss rearrange them.⑵T shows the pictures and Ss tell the story.⑶A guessing game.4.Open the books at Page 9, listen to the tape and read after it.Step 3.Practice

1.Fill the blanks with the correct words.Go/ and/ did/ was/ home list Yesterday a holiday.The children wanted to out.They did not want to stay at.Peter wrote a in his notebook.The children had many ideas.They talked talked.It was very late in the afternoon.They nit go out.They stayed at home all day!

2.Ss practice in four.3.A game??A competition among groups.Step

4.Consolidation Teacher’s notes: Period III Content of courses: textbook P10 Part D&E Teaching aims and demands:

1.Be able to read and write the sentence ” Let’s go to„.” Educational affiliations: textbook, tape, tape-recorder, word cards.Teaching-learning process: Step 1 Warm-up activity

1.Exchange greetings.2.Sing a song we’ve learned last term together.Step 2 Practice

11.Lead-in.T shows the picture of Part D.T says, “What are these place?

12.Pair work.Look at pictures.Say the words of the pictures.13.T writes the words on Bb and help Ss understand the meaning.Read the sentence after T.14.Say the felling words..15.Make the sentences.e.g.I’m hungry.Let’s go to the restaurant.16.Open the books at Page

11.Ss write the sentences on the book.Step

3.Consolidation Teacher’s notes: Unit 4: It’s the Mid-Autumn Festival.Content of courses: textbook P1316workbook P13-16 Teaching aims and demands: Learn the words & phrase: egg yolk/moon cake/ grapes/ tea Be able to master the knowledge of the Mid ?Autumn Festival.Teaching methods: games, reading, action, etc.Period I Content of courses: textbook P14 Part B Teaching aims and demands:

1.Be able to master the words & phrase: egg yolk/moon cake/ grapes/ tea Educational affiliations: textbook, tape, tape-recorder, and word cards.Teaching-learning process: Step 1 Warm-up activity

1.Greeting..2.Let’s play: Look and guess: What is it? Step 2 Presentation & drill

1.Learn to say: egg yolk T takes out an egg and help Ss understand the meaning.Read the sentence after T.2.Learn to say: moon cake T takes out a moon cake and help Ss understand the meaning.Read the word after T.Learn to say: grapes/ tea/ in the same way.11.Drill.⑴T shows the pictures and Ss say the words.⑵T shows the pictures quickly and Ss say the words.⑶A guessing game.12.Open the books at Page14, listen to the tape and read after it.Step

3.Practice

1.Practice in four.Ss play the cards.2.Listen & act.Step

4.Consolidation Teacher’s notes: Period II Content of courses: textbook Part A Part C Teaching aims and demands:

1.Be able to understand and tell the story.Educational affiliations: textbook, tape, tape-recorder, word cards.Teaching-learning process: Step 1 Warm-up activity

1.Exchange greetings.2.Sing a song we’ve learned last term together.Step 2 Presentation & drill

1.Lead-in.T shows the picture of Part A.T says, ”Long, long ago, there was a girl called Chang’e.Do you know her story? Do you know the Mid-Autumn Festival?” T writes the sentence on Bb and help Ss understand the meaning.Read the sentence after T.2.Ss talk about the picture.3.Drill.⑴T shows the pictures and Ss rearrange them.⑵T shows the pictures and Ss tell the story.⑶A guessing game.4.Open the books at Pag13, listen to tape and read after it.Step

3.Practice Answer the questions.1.Why did Chang’e take the magic medicine? 12 She wanted to.2.What did she bring with her to the moon? She brought with her.3.Was Chang’e happy on the moon?.4.How do people celebrate Mid-Autumn Festival?

2.Ss practice in four.3.A game??A competition among groups.Step

4.Consolidation

1.Draw something about Mid-Autumn Festiva and talk about them.Teacher’s notes: Period III Content of courses: textbook P15Part D&E Teaching aims and demands:

1.Be able to understand and say the short passage, answer the questions below, then write the answers on the book.2.Role-play the story.Educational affiliations: textbook, tape, tape-recorder, word cards.Teaching-learning process: Step 1 Warm-up activity

1.Exchange greetings.2.Sing a song we’ve learned last term together.13 Step 2 Practice

17.Lead-in.T shows the picture of Part E.T says, “The family celebrate the festival today.Listen to the tape.What are they doing?”

18.Listen to the tape, number the sentences.19.T writes the sentence on Bb and help Ss understand the meaning.Read the sentence after T.20.Ss say something about the picture.21.Open the books at Page 3, listen to the tape and read after it.22.Fill in the blanks with suitable words.Step

4.Consolidation Teacher’s notes: Unit 5: The children are playing noisily.Content of courses: textbook P17-20 workbook P17-20 Teachingaims and demands:

13.14.Learn the words & phrase: phone/ loudly/quietly/ Can master the sentence ”Don’t „” noisily.Teaching methods: games, reading, action, etc。

Period I Content of courses: textbook P17 Part B Teaching aims and demands:

1.Be able to master the words: phone/loudly/quietly/noisily.Educational affiliations: textbook, tape, tape-recorder, and word cards.Teaching-learning process: Step 1 Warm-up activity

1.Greeting..2.Let’s play: Look and guess: What is it? Step 2 Presentation & drill

1.Learn to say: swing T takes out a phone and help Ss understand the meaning.Read the sentence after T.2.Learn to say: loudly T draws a slide on Bb and help Ss understand the meaning.Read the sentence after T.Learn to say: quietly/ noisily in the same way.Drill.⑴T shows the pictures and Ss say the words.⑵T shows the pictures quickly and Ss say the words.⑶A guessing game.Open the books at Page 2, listen to the tape and read after it Step

3.Practice

1.Practice in four.Ss play the cards.2.Listen & act.Step

4.Consolidation Teacher’s notes: Period II Content of courses: textbook Part A Part C Teaching aims and demands:

1.Be able to understand and tell the story.Educational affiliations: textbook, tape, tape-recorder, word cards.Teaching-learning process: Step 1 Warm-up activity

1.Exchange greetings.2.Sing a song we’ve learned last term together.Step 2 Presentation & drill

1.Lead-in.T shows the picture of Part A.T says, “The children are playing in the living room.Listen to the tape.What are they talking about?” T writes the sentence on Bb and help Ss understand the meaning.Read the sentence after T.2.Ss talk about the picture.3.Drill.⑴T shows the pictures and Ss rearrange them.⑵T shows the pictures and Ss tell the story.⑶A guessing game.4.Open the books at Page 1, listen to the tape and read after it.Step 3.Practice 1.Answer the questions.She is.1.What are the children doing in the living room? They are.2.How is Dongdong playing? He.3.Who is talking loudly?.2.Ss practice in four.3.A game??A competition among groups.Step

4.Consolidation Teacher’s notes: Periord Ⅲ Content of courses: textbook P3 Part D&E&F Teaching aims and demands:

1.Be able to read and write the sentence ”Don’t „” Educational affiliations: textbook, tape, tape-recorder, word cards.Teaching-learning process: Step 1 Warm-up activity

1.Exchange greetings.2.Sing a song we’ve learned last term together.Step 2 Practice 23.Lead-in.T shows the picture of Part D.T says, “People are saying today.Look at the pictures.What are they saying?”

24.Pair work.Look at pictures.Describe what each person is saying.25.Write sentences about 5 of the above pictures.e.g.Play quietly.Don’t play noisily.26.T writes the sentence on Bb and help Ss understand the meaning.Read the sentence after T.27.Ss describe the pictures.28.Open the books at Page 18, Ss write the sentences on the book.Step

3.Learn to sing Row row row your boat Step

4.Consolidation Teacher’s notes: Unit 6 : How tall are you Content of courses: textbook P21-24 workbook P21-24 Teaching aims and demands:

1.Learn the words: weak/ worried/ light/ heavy.2.Can master the sentence ”How old/tall/heavy are you?” and answers.Teaching methods: games, reading, action, etc.Period I Content of courses: textbook P2 Part B Teaching aims and demands:

1.Be able to master the words: weak/ worried/ light/ heavy Educational affiliations: textbook, tape, tape-recorder, and word cards.Teaching-learning process: Step 1 Warm-up activity

1.Greeting..2.Let’s play: Look and guess: What is it? Step 2 Presentation & drill

1.Learn to say: weak T puts hands on the head and feels sick and help Ss understand the meaning.Read the sentence after T.2.Learn to say: worried T asks what your mother felt when you were sick and help Ss understand the meaning.Read the sentence after T.Learn to say: light/ heavy in the same way.3.Drill.⑴T shows the pictures and Ss say the words.⑵T shows the pictures quickly and Ss say the words.⑶A guessing game.4.Open the books at Page 2, listen to the tape and read after it.Step

3.Practice

1.Practice in four.Ss play the cards.2.Listen & act.Step

4.Consolidation Teacher’s notes: Period II Content of courses: textbook Part A Part C Teaching aims and demands:

1.Be able to understand and tell the story.Educational affiliations: textbook, tape, tape-recorder, word cards.Teaching-learning process: Step 1 Warm-up activity

1.Exchange greetings.2.Sing a song we’ve learned last term together.Step 2 Presentation & drill Lead-in.T acks as a doctor and takes out a talbe asks:How old are you?/ How tall are you?/How heavy are you?T writes the sentence on Bb and help Ss understand the meaning.Read the sentence after T.2.Ss talk about the picture.3.Drill.⑴T shows the pictures and Ss rearrange them.⑵T shows the pictures and Ss act the dialouge.⑶A guessing game.4.Open the books at Page 1, listen to the tape and read after it.Step

3.Practice

1.Give short answers to these questions.What’s the matter with you? I'm.How old are you? I’m.How tall are you? I'm.How heavy are you? I’m.2.Ss practice in four.3.A game??A competition among groups.Step

4.Consolidation

1.Draw your favorite things and talk about them.Teacher’s notes: Period III Content of courses: textbook P3 Part D&E Teaching aims and demands:

1.Be able to read and write the sentence ” How old/tall/heavy are you?”and answers Educational affiliations: textbook, tape, tape-recorder, word cards.Teaching-learning process: Step 1 Warm-up activity

1.Exchange greetings.2.Sing a song we’ve learned last term together.21 Step 2 Practice

29.Lead-in.T asks the following questions: How old/tall/heavy are you? Pair work.Look at pictures.Ask each other questions.Write down the answers.30.A suvey: Extension How heavy is your bag? How long is your arm?...31.T writes the sentence on Bb and help Ss understand the meaning.Read the sentence after T.32.Let’s ask and write Look at the chart.Ask three of your classmates questions.Write short sentences to describe them.33.Open the books at Page24, Ss write the sentences on the book.Step

3.Consolidation Teacher’s notes: Unit 7 : These horns are too big.Content of courses: textbook P25-28 workbook P25-28 Teaching aims and demands:

5.Learn the words: foolish/ bull/ horn/ kill/ rubbed.6.Can master the sentence ”Can you „ ?” and answers.Teaching methods: games, reading, action, etc.Period I Content of courses: textbook P2 Part B Teaching aims and demands:

1.Be able to master the words: foolish/ bull/ horn/ kill/ rubbed.Educational affiliations: textbook, tape, tape-recorder, and word cards.Teaching-learning process: Step 1 Warm-up activity

1.Greeting..2.Let’s play: Look and guess: What is it? Step 2 Presentation & drill

1.Learn to say: bull T draws a bull on Bb and help Ss understand the meaning.Read the sentence after T.2.Learn to say: horn T draws a horn on Bb and help Ss understand the meaning.Read the sentence after T.Learn to say: kill/ rubbed in the same way.7.Drill.⑴T shows the pictures and Ss say the words.⑵T shows the pictures quickly and Ss say the words.⑶A guessing game.8.Open the books at Page 2, listen to the tape and read after it.23 Step

3.Practice

1.Practice in four.Ss play the cards.2.Listen & act.Step

4.Consolidation Teacher’s notes: Period II Content of courses: textbook Part A Part C Teaching aims and demands:

1.Be able to understand and tell the story.Educational affiliations: textbook, tape, tape-recorder, word cards.Teaching-learning process: Step 1 Warm-up activity 1.Exchange greetings.2.Sing a song we’ve learned last term together.Step 2 Presentation & drill 1.Lead-in.T shows the picture of Part A.T says, “This is a lion This is a bull.Listen to the tape.What are they talking about?” T writes the sentence on Bb and help Ss understand the meaning.Read the sentence after T.2.Ss talk about the picture.3.Drill.⑴T shows the pictures and Ss rearrange them.⑵T shows the pictures and Ss tell the story.⑶A guessing game.4.Open the books at Page 1, listen to the tape and read after it.24 Step

3.Practice

1.Give short answers to these questions.Where was the bull? The bull was.What did the lion want to do to the bull? The lion wanted to.What did the lion say to the bull? The lion told the bull that his horns were.What did the bull do? The bull rubbed.2.Ss practice in four.3.A game??A competition among groups.Step

4.Consolidation

1.Draw your favorite things and talk about them.Teacher’s notes: Period III Content of courses: textbook P3 Part D&E Teaching aims and demands:

1.Be able to read and write the sentence ” Can you„?”and answers Educational affiliations: textbook, tape, tape-recorder, word cards.Teaching-learning process: Step 1 Warm-up activity

1.Exchange greetings.2.Sing a song we’ve learned last term together.Step 2 Practice

34.Lead-in.T shows the picture of Part D.T says, “People are doing something today.Look at the pictures.What are they doing?”

35.Pair work.Look at pictures.Draw lines to match each picture to what the children are saying.36.Look at the pictures of Part D and answer questions about each of these things.37.T writes the sentence on Bb and help Ss understand the meaning.Read the sentence after T.38.Ss answer the questions.39.Open the books at Page27, Ss write the sentences on the book.3.Consolidation Teacher’s notes: Unit 8 My singing is louder than yours.Period 1 Teaching aims and demands:

1.Be able to listen and say the new sentence pattern.2.Learn to say new words

3.Do part C.Teaching main and difficult points:

1.bigger smaller

2.John is thinner than Tony and Alan.3.Alan is taller than John but he is shorter than Tony.Teaching tools:

1.Tape recorder

2.Some pictures Teaching steps: Step

1.Organization of class

1.Greetings:

2.Warm-up activities: T: Hello, boys and girls, nice to see you.Now let’s listen and do.Run/ walk/ play/ eat/ drink/ sing/ dance„ How do you feel when you sing and dance? Ss will say the word ”happy”.T: Don’t run/ Don’t walk/ don’t play„ How do you feel when you are not allowed to do these things? Ss will say sad or angry.T teaches the words: angry pleased Step

2.Presentation

1.T shows 2 apples: Look!This apple is bigger and that apple is smaller.One do you like?

2.Ss learn to say : bigger smaller

3.T: right;.Look!The garden is bigger and the hole is smaller.But who is taller? Let’s see.4.T shows pictures of John, Tony , and Alan.Ss learn to say : Tony is taller than John and Alan.Alan is taller than John.John is thinner than Tony and Alan.5.Ss make sentences with words: bigger smaller taller

6.T: big and small are antonyms.Can you give me more antonyms? moon?

7.Ss give out more antonyms and make sentences with them.8.Ss read the sentences in Part D and do it by themselves.? What are the boy and girl talking about? T sums up the new sentence pattern of comparative sentence.step3: Practice: tep3:

1.Let’s play a game T: There are some antonyms in the box.Try to say a comparative sentence with them.Ss take turns to pick out the word then say a sentence about them.Ss read and write these words.2.Listen to the tape and read after the tape.Ss do part D by themselves.Step4: Writing: Period 2 Teaching aims and demands:

4.Be able to listen and say Part AB

5.Learn to say the words.6.Understand and act the story Teaching difficult points:

4.The bigger bird always pushed the smaller bird away and ate most of the food, leaving only a little for the smaller bird.5.The smaller bird sang softer and softer.Teaching tools: Tape recorder Some pictures Teaching steps: Step

1.Organization of class

3.Greetings:

4.Warm-up activities: T: Let’s listen and do.Long-short tall-short fat-thin younger-old big-small Ss review words: garden hole smaller bigger taller thinner fatter Presentation Step

2.Presentation Ss look at picture1 and answer questions:

1.Where did the 2 birds live?

2.What was their difference? Ss read sentences of picture

1.T teaches picture2: What did the bigger bird say ? What did the bigger bird always do? Did the bigger bird do the right thing ? Why?? T teaches Picture3: What happened to the little bird? What did the girl want to do? T teach Picture 4: Where did the girl put the food? What was on the box? Could the bigger bird get the food? Why it couldn’t? What did the bird do then? T teaches picture5 How did the girl feel ? What did the girl say? Ss answer these questions and read the story.Step3: Practice: T: Let’s open books and turn to page

32.Ss tick the correct sentences according to the story.T checks the answers:

1.The girl fed the birds.2.The bigger bird ate most of the food.3.The smaller bird sang louder than the bigger bird.4.The bigger bird could not get the food from the box.Step4: Writing: Period 3 Teaching aims and demands:

7.Be able to understand the story in Part A.8.Finish the excises of Part F.Teaching difficult points:

6.Learn to use new sentences freely.7.Part D and F.Teaching tools:

3.Tape recorder

4.Some pictures Teaching steps: Step

1.Organization of class

5.Greetings:

6.Warm-up activities: T: Hello, boys and girls, nice to see you.Open your books and turn to page 13, look at the text.Read after me.Ask Ss to read the text collectively.Students read the text in roles.Some students act as little teacher and teach others。

2.Presentation Ss make comparative sentences with words: Fatter thinner taller shorter longer shorter Ss write the bigger bird or the smaller bird according to the story.1.This bird became thinner and thinner.2.This bird ate more than the other bird.3.This bird could get the food easily through the hole.Do Part E.1.My toy dog is cheaper than yours.2.My car is older than yours.3.My basket is bigger than yours.4.My book is smaller than yours.Step3: Practice: Ss read the whole lesson.Do exercises of Unit

8.Step4: Writing: Unit 9 What is Dongdong going to do? Period 1 Teaching aims and demands:

1.Be able to listen and say the new sentence pattern.2.Learn to say new words

3.Do part E.Teaching main and difficult points:

1.The mastery of the patterns: What is Dongdong going to do?

2.The phrases : pick up, put down, shout Teaching tools:

1.Tape recorder

2.Some pictures Teaching steps: Step

1.Organization of class

1.Greetings:

2.Warm-up activities: T: Hello, boys and girls, nice to see you.Now let’s listen and do: Read books, watch TV, get up, go to school, go to bed, etc.Step

2.Presentation

1.T ask a student who is doing the actions: T: What are you going to do? S: I’m going to „.2.3.Get the whole class to read the new patterns.Learn the new phrases: pick up, put down, shout Let S ask the teacher when T is going to pick up a book, put down the book on the desk and shout.S: What are you going to do? T: I’m going to pick up a book/ put down the book on the desk/ shout.Write the new words and praises on the Bb.Pick up put down shout Get the class to read the phrases together.A drill: Ask and answer using the new language items.Step

3.Practice

1.A guessing game: Get the class to guess out the actions by asking and answering with the new language items.2.Do the exercises of Part C.Step4: Writing: Period 2 Teaching aims and demands:

1.Be able to listen and say Part A

2.Learn to say the new sentence pattern.3.Understand the story.difficult Teaching difficult points:

1.Understand and say the story of Part A.2.The mastery of the new patterns.Teaching tools:

3.Tape recorder

4.Some pictures Teaching steps: Step

1.Organization of class

1.Greetings:

2.Warm-up activities: Ss review words in Part B.Step

2.Presentation Ss look at picture1 and answer questions:

4.Where are the children?

5.What is Lingling look at? Ss read sentences of picture

1.T teaches picture2: What is Dongdong going to do? Ss read sentences in Picture

2.T teaches Picture3: What is Dongdong going to do? T teaches picture 4: What is Lingling going to do when she looks at Dongdong? T teaches picture5 What is Lingling say to Dongdong? T teaches Picture 6: Explain the meaning of Scold.Ss answer these questions and read the story.Practice: Step3: Practice: T: Let’s open books and turn to page

40.Ss fill in the blanks.T checks the answers.Step4: Writing: Period 3 Teaching aims and demands:

1.Be able to understand the story in Part A.2.Finish the excises of Part D.points: Teaching difficult points:

1.Learn to use new sentences freely.2.Part D and F.Teaching tools:

1.Tape recorder

2.Some pictures Teaching steps: Step

1.Organization of class

1.Greetings:

2.Warm-up activities: T: Hello, boys and girls, nice to see you.Open your books and turn to page 40, look at the text.Read after me.Ask Ss to read the text collectively.Students read the text in roles.Some students act as little teacher and teach others.Step

2.Presentation

1.learn some new praises of verb.Buy some meat Go to school open her umbrella cross the road read the newspaper stop his car

2.Ask and answer using the pictures of Part D.What is Mr Wu going to do? She is going to do „.3.Practise in pairs.Practice: Step3: Practice:

1.Ss read the whole lesson.2.Do exercises of Part E.3.Read the rhyme of Part F.Step4: Writing: Unit 10 Are you going to visit Anne?.Period 1 Teaching aims and demands:

9.Be able to listen and say the new sentence pattern.10.Learn to say new words difficult Teaching main and difficult points: Learn to say the patterns: Are you going to „.? Yes, I am./ No, I’m not.Teaching tools:

5.Tape recorder

6.Some pictures Teaching steps: Step

1.Organization of class

7.Greetings:

8.Warm-up activities: T: Hello, boys and girls, nice to see you.3.A game: Now let’s listen and do.Step

2.Presentation:

1.Learn the new praises: see a film

2.Learn to ask: T: Are you going to see a film? S: Yes, I am./ No, I am not.3.Practice in pairs using the phrases cards.4.T sums up the Practice: Step3: Practice:

3.Let’s play a game: T prepares pictures of the verbs to let Ss choose the right picture.Ss listen to the tape and read after the tape.Writing: Step4: Writing: 36 play with sb.Go out buy something for sb.new sentence pattern for students.Period 2 Teaching aims and demands:

1.Be able to listen and say Part AB

2.Learn to say the new sentence pattern.11.Understand the story.Teaching difficult points: To understand the story and learn to act out.Teaching tools:

1.Tape recorder

2.Some pictures Teaching steps: Step

1.Organization of class

1.Greetings:

2.Warm-up activities: Step

2.Presentation Ss look at picture1 and answer questions: Where is Lingling? What day was yesterday? Ss read sentences of picture

1.T teaches picture2: What did Lingling do? Write: walk down the stairs Learn the new words: stairs Ss read sentences in Picture

2.T teaches Picture3: What did Lingling do? Write “walk along the stree” What did Dongdong do? Write “follow” on the Bb.T teaches picture 4: What did dongdong say in picture 4? T teaches picture5 How did Dongdong feel ? Learn the word: excited 37 T teaches Picture 6 What did Lingling buy for Dongdong? Learn: huge Ss answer these questions and read the story.Practice: Step3: Practice: T: Let’s open books and turn to page

44.Ss match A to B.T checks the answers.Step4: Writing: Period 3 Teaching aims and demands:

12.13.Be able to understand the story in Part A.Finish the excises of Part D and E.Teaching difficult points:

8.Learn to use new sentences freely.9.Part D and E.Teaching tools:

7.Tape recorder

8.Some pictures Teaching steps: Step

1.Organization of class

9.Greetings:

10.Warm-up activities: T: Hello, boys and girls, nice to see you.Open your books and turn to page 44, look at the text.Read after me.Ask Ss to read the text collectively.Students read the text in roles.Some students act as little teacher and teach others.Step

2.Presentation Ss review words and sentences: Are you going to see a film? Are you going out? Are you going to play with Anne? Are you going to buy something? Practice: Step3: Practice: Ss do Part D in page D.Ss read the whole lesson.Do exercises of Unit

11.Step4: Writing: Unit 11 When are we going to swim? Period 1 Teaching aims and demands:

1.Be able to listen and say the new sentence pattern.2.Learn to say new words

3.Do part E.Teaching main and difficult points:

1.beach dangerous sand swimming suit

2.Where are we going to swim? Teaching tools:

1.Tape recorder

2.Some pictures Teaching steps: Step

1.Organization of class of

1.Greetings:

2.Sing a song we’ve learned last period together.3.Warm-up activities: T: Hello, boys and girls, nice to see you.Now let’s listen and do.Pick up, put down, shout, follow, excited „

4.Let’s play: Look and guess: What is it? Step

2.Step

2.Presentation Lead-in.T shows the picture of Part B and teach the new words in this unit: beach, sand, dangerous, swimming suit.1.Learn to say: beach and sand T takes out a picture of beach and help Ss understand the meaning.Read the two new words after T and make sentences.2.Learn to say:dangerous T shows many pictures of dangerous and help Ss to understand the meaning.Read the sentence after T.3.Learn to say:swimming suit T shows a material object of swimming suit and help Ss to understand the meaning.Read the sentence after T.4.Make sentences with the new words.5.Drill.⑴T shows the pictures and Ss say the words.⑵T shows the pictures quickly and Ss say the words.⑶A guessing game.6.Open the books at Page 48, listen to the tape and read after it.Practice: step3: Practice:

4.Let’s play a game: T prepares pictures in Part B to let Ss choose the right picture.5.Practice in four.Ss play the words’ cards.6.Listen & act.Step4: Writing: Period 2 Teaching aims and demands:

1.Be able to listen and say Part AB

2.Learn to say the new sentence pattern.3.Understand the story.Teaching difficult points:

1„.be going to„.2.When are we going to swim?

3.We are going to put on our swimming suits first.Teaching tools:

1.Tape recorder

2.Some pictures steps: Teaching steps: Step

1.Organization of class

1.Greetings:

2.sing a song together.2.Warm-up activities: T: Let’s listen and do.3.Review the words in Part B.Step

2.Presentation

1.T shows the pictures of Part A.T says, “Lingling and Dongdong want to do something today.Look at the pictures.What are they going to do?” Ss: Swim.T: Yes.They are going to swim.2.T ask the Ss to read the story by themselves.3.Ss talk about the story and get ready to answer some questions: What are Lingling and Dongdong going to do? Where is the bus going to take them? Who are they going to meet? What are they going to put on first?

7.T Check the answer of these questions and teach the story.8.Open the books at Page 47, listen to the tape and read after it.6.T shows the pictures and Ss tell the story.Practice: Step3: Practice:

1.T: Let’s open books and turn to page48 and do the exercises in Part C.2.Ss practice in groups

3.A game??A competition among groups.Step4: Writing: Period 3 Teaching Teaching aims and demands:

1.Be able to understand the story Teaching difficult points:

1.Learn to use new sentences freely.2.Part D and F.Teaching tools:

1.Tape recorder

2.Some pictures steps: Teaching steps: in Part A.2.Finish the excises of Part D, Part E and Part F.Step

1.Organization of class

1.Greetings:

2.Warm-up activities: T: Hello, boys and girls, nice to see you.Open your books and turn to page 47, look at the text.Read after me.Ask Ss to read the text collectively.Students read the text in roles.Some students act as little teacher and teach others.Step

2.Presentation Ss review words and sentences: The bus is going to take them to the beach.We are going to swim.We are going to meet Anne, Peter and Mingming.We are going to swim soon.We are going to put on our swimming suits first.What are we going to do? Who are we going to meet? When are we going to swim? Can we have lunch first? Don’t swim after a meal.It’s dangerous.43 Practice: Step3: Practice:

1.Ss do Part D E in page

49.2.Ss read the whole lesson.3.Listen to the tape carefully and do exercises in Part F.4.T check the answers.Step4: Writing: Unit 12 Christmas Period 1 Teaching aims and demands:

16.Be able to listen and say the new sentence pattern.Learn to say new words Merry Christmas.Teaching main and difficult points:

1.words: decorations, Santa Claus

2.Merry Christmas.Teaching tools: Tape recorder Some pictures Teaching steps: Step

1.Organization of class

1.Greetings:

2.Warm-up activities: T: Hello, boys and girls, nice to see you.Let’s sing “ happy new year”.Step

2.Presentation

1.T: Hello.Boys and girls.I’m very happy today.A new friend is coming.Look!(Music: A Merry Christmas!)T: Hello, Santa Claus!Nice to meet you!Santa Claus: Hello, Miss Li.Nice to meet you!Music stops.T: Boys and girls.Let me introduce a friend to you.This is Santa Claus.Let’s greet him.Hello, Santa Claus.Learn to say: Santa Claus.T: We can also call him Father Christmas.Learn to say: Father Christmas.2.T: Now I’m Santa Claus.Hello, boys and girls.Nice to meet you!Ss: Hello, Santa Claus.Nice to meet you, too.T: Today is the 25th of December.It’s the Christmas Day.Look!This is a Christmas tree.Learn to say: Christmas tree.3.T: Oh, what is this? It’s a Christmas card.People always send Christmas card to relatives and friends for good wishes.Learn to say: Christmas card.4.T: Oh, it’s a stocking.You can find your Christmas presents in it on Christmas Day.Learn to say: stocking, Christmas present Step3: Practice: : Practice:

9.Let’s listen and read Part B.10.Let’s play a game T: There are some antonyms in the box.Try to say a comparative sentence with them.Ss take turns to pick out the word then say a sentence about them.Ss read and write these words.11.Listen to the tape and read after the tape.Ss do part D by themselves.Step4: Writing: Period 2 Teaching aims and demands:

17.Be able to listen and say Part B

2.Be able to use the sentence: What presents do you want,children? I want „

3.Merry Christmas。

Teaching main and difficult points:

1.Sentence: What presents do you want,children? I want „

2.Merry Christmas.Teaching tools: Tape recorder Some pictures Teaching steps: Step

1.Organization of class

1.Greetings:

2.Warm-up activities: T: Hello, boys and girls, nice to see you.Let’s sing “Merry Christmas”.Step

2.Presentation

1.T: Hello.Boys and girls.Santa Claus is coming.When is the Christmas Day? S: Christmas Day falls on 25 December.T: Father Christmas will give some gifts to children.What do you like? S: I like a computer.I like a bike.I like a doll.„ T: Oh, I think I like a book.I want an English book.Because I like reading.47 What presents do you want, children? Santa Claus: Hello, children, Nice to meet you!S: Hello, Santa Claus.Nice to meet you, too!Santa Claus: I will give some gifts for you.What presents do you want, children? S: I want a computer.I want a book.I want a bag.„ Step3: Practice: : Practice:

12.13.Let’s listen and read the sentence.Let’s play a game T: There are some gifts in the box.Try to say the sentence: I want a „ you can get the presents what do you want.S(act a Santa Claus): What presents do you want,children? S1: I want a „ S2: I want a „ ★ ★★ ★ „

Listen to the tape and read after the tape.Step4: Writing: Period 3 Ss do part D by themselves.Teaching aims and demands:

18.Be able to listen and say Part A/B

2.Understand the story.4.Merry Christmas.Teaching main and difficult points:

1.Sentence: What presents do you want,children? I want „ 48

2.Merry Christmas.Teaching tools: Tape recorder Some pictures Teaching steps: Step

1.Organization of class

1.Greetings:

2.Warm-up activities: T: Hello, boys and girls, nice to see you.Let’s sing “Merry Christmas”.Step

2.Presentation

1.T: Hello.Boys and girls.Listen to the tape.What happened about the story? T: Oh, Just now we learned something about Christmas.Do you want to know more about it? Please read the text as quickly as you can and answer the following questions: Who is Father Christmas? What do people do during Christmas?

2.Listen to the tape and read after the tape.3.Read the words: the west, falls, Christmas Day, Christmas tree, Christmas card, Santa Claus, presents, Merry Christmas, robt„ Step3: Practice: : Practice:

16.Let’s listen and read the text.Choose a picture and repeat the picture of the text.Step4: Writing:

3.Repeat the text together.

第五篇:六年级上册英语教案

Unit 1 How Do You Go There?

第一课时

教学目标:

1、能够听、说、读、写短语:on foot, by bike, by bus, by train。

2、能够听、说、认读短语:by plane, by ship, by subway。

3、能用句子 “How d0 you go to school? How do you go to Canada/„?” 来替换询问别人的出行方式;并能够用句子 “I go by„” 进行回答。

4、听懂、会吟唱Let's chant的歌谣。

5、帮助学生了解交通规则,并在生活中自觉遵守交通规则。教学重难点:

掌握四会短语和A Let's learn部分中运用某种交通工具去某地的表达法,并能替换关键词进行问答。课前准备:

1、教师准备Let's start部分和主情景图的教学课件。

2、教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。

3、教师准备A Let's learn部分的单词卡片。教学步骤:

一、热身(Warm-up)

1、复习副词:always,usually,often,sometimes,never的读音与词义。

T: When do you get up? / When do you go to school? „(引导学生用always,usually,often,sometimes回答)

2、T:Today I go to school by bus.I usually go to school on foot.教师利用肢体动作帮助学生理解句子意思。

T:What about you? Do you go by bike or by bus? Do you go on foot? Or by car? 师生之间自由会话,引出几种常见的交通方式。引导学生看本课Let's start部分的标图并回答问题。

二、预习(Preview)

1、快速反应游戏

2、Let's chant

教师放本课Let's chant部分的录音,唱到on foot时,全班跺跺脚;唱到by car/ bike/ bus/ plane/ train的时候,学生做出相应的动作。然后教师根据歌谣内容随机出示Let's learn部分的单词卡片加深学生印象,全班学生再跟录音边唱边做一遍。

三、新课呈现(Presentation)

Let's learn

1、教师做动作,自问自答: “How do I go to school? I go to school by bike.” 并在黑板上写下:by bike。教师再重复刚才的句子并问某一学生: What about you? How do you go to school? 教师帮助学生说出完整的句子: “I go to school by„” 并将相应的短语写在黑板上。

2、看短语贴卡片游戏

教师依次出示画着不同交通工具的短语卡片,让学生迅速地贴在黑板上的by短语旁边,教师领读短语和句子 “l go to school by...”

3、“快速反应” 游戏

教师说出某个短语,如:by bike,让学生做相应的动作并说出句子,如:I go to school by bike.4、教师拿出刚才学生可能没有提到的交通工具的图片,如:by plane/subway/ ship/ boat等,呈现和练习这些短语。然后指着课本上的配图问:“What can you see in the pictures?” 注意引导学生理解“地铁”的含义: “It's an underground railway in a city.It travels very fast.” 教师领读新学短语。

5、学生听录音,跟读Let's learn部分的内容。教师注意纠正学生的语音、语调。

6、教师引导学生进行单词的拼读竞赛。可空出单词中的元音字母让学生填写, 也可打乱组成单词的字母的顺序,让学生重新排序,组成单词。

7、Let's play 教师请学生说一些地点,比如:school, Beijing, the US, the moon等;教师鼓励学生大胆想象出行方式和所去地点。然后学生两人结对进行句型操练,一人问 “How do you go to Beijing/ the USA/ the moon?” 另一学生给出答案: “I go by train/ plane/ spaceship.”

四、巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)

1、教师引导学生看主情景图,说出其中表现的交通方式。学生多能说出:on foot,by bike, by subway。如有学生问及小丑骑的独轮车以及幼儿骑的三轮儿童车教师可补充说明那分别是unicycle和tricycle;而自行车bike的另一说法:bicycle,意为两轮车。

2、学生做Let's learn部分的活动手册配套练习;教师指导学生规范书写。新学伊始,教师非常有必要对学生重申一下书写的要求。

五、Homework

1、学生背诵并抄写四会单词;

2、学生预习C Let's sing部分的歌曲。教学后记:

第二课时

教学目标:

1、能听、说、读、写四会掌握句子: “How do you go to school? Usually I go to school on foot.Sometimes I go by bike.” 并能在情景中正确运用。

2、能够表述自己以何种方式上学并简单陈述原因,如:Usually I go to school by bus,because it's fast.3、能够听懂Let's try的录音内容并选出正确选项,掌握Let's talk,Let’s read部分的句型。

4、学会调查和统计、分析数据,并能表示出来。教学重、难点:

1、重点是听、说、读、写句型:How do you go to school? Usually/ Sometimes I go by„

2、难点是学生书写四会句子并能简单陈述选择某种交通方式上学的原因。课前准备:

1、教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。

2、教师准备本单元A Let's learn部分的单词卡片。

3、学生每人准备一张卡片,画一个印象最深刻的交通标志。教学步骤:

一、热身(Warm-up)

1、听一听,猜一猜

2、Greeting

T: “Good morning!How do you go to school today? What about you? Do you go by bus, too?” 然后学生复习Let's chant部分的歌谣。

二、预习(Preview)

1、教师出示单词卡片,提问:“How do you go to school?” 学生根据图片内容回答

“I go to school by„” 师生会话直到班级里大部分学生能够准确说出图中交通工具的名称以及该句型。然后学生两人一组练习句型: “How do you go to school? I go to school by„”

2、Let's try

三、新课呈现(Presentation)

Let's talk

1、教师放课文录音,之前向学生提出问题: “How does Sarah go to school? Listen.”学生听后模拟Sarah来回答问题。

2、学生跟读录音,然后两人一组替换句型中的关键词练习对话。

3、Group work:

T: “How do I go to school,do you know? Ask me,please!” 然后教师在黑板上画一辆自行车、一辆公共汽车和一辆计程车的图案,并分别在后面两图旁标当地的价格,如:l yuan, 7 yuan回答说:“Usually I go to school by bike, because it's good exercise.Sometimes I go by bus, because it's cheap.It costs l yuan.Sometimes I go by taxi, because it's fast, but it's too expensive.It costs 10 yuan.教师让学生四人一组,了解同学用何种互方式上学,并鼓励学生简单阐述原因,如:My home is near.It's fast.It's cheap.Good exercise„

4、Let' read 学生四人小组阅读,并完成课后练习。

5、听录音,跟读。教师对学生仍有疑问的地方讲解。

四、巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)

1、学生回家调查父母及其他亲戚的上班方式,写一篇小作文。

2、找出peak/ beat/ team/ deal/ pig/ big/ tin/ dish的读音之间的区别。

五、Homework

1、学生背诵并抄写Let's talk部分。

2、学生预习Let's read部分。教学后记:

第三课时

教学目标:

1、能够充分理解并正确朗读对话,能完成文后回答问题的练习。

2、能够了解辅音/p/,/b/,/t/,/d/与元音/i:/,/i/的发音规则.3、了解Good to know部分的内容,能够辨认常见的交通标志,如:Cross way.No entry.No bikes.Turn right.No left turn.教学重、难点:

1、重点是学生能够充分理解并正确朗读对话。

2、难点是如何指引他人在不同地点换用不同的交通工具到达某一地点。课前准备:

1、教师准备录音机以及录音带。

2、教师课前在教室里张贴各种交通工具的图片或准备多媒体来展示。

3、学生每人准备一张白纸。教学步骤:

一、热身(Warm-up)

教师放C Let's sing部分的录音,学生跟唱。可组织男女生各唱一遍,看谁好。

二、新课呈现(Presentation)

Let's read

1、最佳路线“活动

教师用简笔画呈现两个情境:Bob家住在山上,山脚有一条河,河对岸有公交车站通向学校;May家离学校很远,家附近有个地铁站,May的学校附近虽没有地铁站,但有一路公交车直通地铁站的入口。教师让学生分组活动,设计最佳上学路线,原则是省时方便。教师注意指导学生使用连词then来表示动作的先后顺序。教师要求各组派一人假设自己是Bob或May,上讲台汇报。

2、教师说: “Now let's read the dialogue and find out how Sarah goes to the park.Can you draw the route on your paper?” 学生两人一小组分角色朗读对话,教师在教室里巡回走动,解惑答疑,并指导学生简单画出Sarah的路线。

3、教师展示学生画出的路线并示范如何描述Sarah去公园的路程:“First,Sarah go to Zhang Peng's home by bike.Next, Sarah and Zhang Peng go to the bus stop on foot.Then they can go to the park by bus.” 教师板书first,next,then,让学生知道恰当使用一些连词有助于表达更为流畅。然后请几名学生依照顺序来描述Sarah和Zhang Peng去公园的路线,比一比谁说得最好。

4、教师放Let's read部分的录音,学生跟读。

5、学生两人一组练习对话。

三、巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)

1、教师随意抽取一张学生课前填写的调查表,对该学生说: “You've been to Harbin.Is it a nice city? What can you see there? How do you go there?” 问同组其他三名学生以上几个问题。学生仍以四人一小组的形式展开活动,用问题: “Do you go to„by„?” 测某一小组成员到达表格中目的地的方式。一人只有一次猜测机会,不对,大家再一起问: “How do you go there?” 该学生回答。每小组选一名代表描述自己曾去过的某个地方。

2、Good to know:

教师询问学生课本上各个交通标志的意思: “What's the meaning?” 然后帮助学生回答: “Turn right.Crosswalk.One way.” 等。再让学生完成图与文字搭配的练习。鼓励学生展示课前绘制的交通标志图并寻找更多交通标志与其他同学进行交流.3、学生听录音、跟读对话。

四、Homework 学生背诵并抄写Let's read部分。

教学后记:

第四课时

教学目标:

1、能够听、说、认读以下短语:Stop at a red light.Wait at a yellow light.Go at a green light.能够听、说、读、写短语和单词:stop,wait,traffic lights,traffic rules。

2、能够了解基本的交通规则,即红灯、黄灯、绿灯的功能;并能听懂英语指令做出相应的动作。教学重、难点:

1、重点是掌握四会短语和单词:stop,wait,traffic lights,traffic rules。

2、难点是书写短语traffic light,traffic rule和理解动词stop,wait的含义。课前准备:

1、教师准备兔子舞的音乐和录音机、本课时的录音带及教学挂图。

2、教师在一块板上挂红黄绿三张圆形纸卡。

3、学生准备本课时的单词卡片。教学步骤:

一、热身(Warm-up)

”兔子舞“游戏

教师放兔子舞的音乐,全班学生排成长队,后面学生把手搭在前面学生的肩膀上,随着音乐的指令 “Left-Right-Go-Turn around-Go,go,go”,队伍开始向前慢慢移动,教师最好也参与游戏。

二、预习(Preview)

1、师生一起吟唱Let's chant的歌谣。

2、教师从歌谣中引出问题:“How do you go to school?”请学生根据实际情况回答,复习A部分主要句型。

三、新课呈现(Presentation)

1、教师指着教室里的日光灯说:I like the lights because I can see things clearly at night.Can we see lights in different colors in our city? Yes!Turn light, traffic lights.2、教师边画简笔画,边说:”We have red,yellow,and green lights.We call them traffic lights.教师板书traffic fights,然后问学生:“What do they mean,do you know?” 学生可能会用汉语回答,教师点头表示肯定,再请学生回答:“When do we stop/ wait/ go?”引导学生回答:We stop at a red light...3、教师出示自制红绿灯,请一名学生随意指向不同的颜色,教师示范动作,比如:看见绿灯,教师一边向前走一边说:“It is a green light.I can go.Go-go.Go!” 看见黄灯,停住不动但摆动双臂示意要走:“It is a yellow light.I must wait.Wait-wait-wait!I can go in a moment.” 看见红灯,提问学生:“The light is red.Call I go? No,no,no!It's dangerous!I must stop.Stop-stop-stop!”

4、教师板书stop,wait,go在相应的交通灯旁。为了帮助学生区别stop与wait,可以适当使用汉语解释词义。

5、Let's play

教师请出若干名学生,根据指令做相应的动作,连续做错两次动作的学生将被淘汰,如:教师说red light,学生停着不动,教师说yellow light,学生做好走的准备,教师说green light,学生往前走。然后换一组学生再做这个游戏,由其中一名学生来发指令。也可让全班学生分成六人一组分别进行小组活动。最后教师小结:“Stop at a red fight.Wait at a yellow light-Go at a green light Red light.yellow fight,green light.These are traffic lights.”教师再指着以上三句话总结说:These are traffic rules.

6、教师继续提问:“What does the' traffic rule 'mean?”板书并解释traffic rule,鼓励学生说出Let's learn部分的三个句子。然后教师说.Yes.These are traffic rules.You must remember the traffic rules.“通过手势帮助学习理解remember的意思。

7、教师放Let's learn部分的录音,学生跟读。

8、教师引导学生以竞赛的形式书写四会单词和短语。可先引导学生利用学生卡片背面的灰体词进行单词描红,学生边描边拼读单词。

四、巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)

师生讨论不同的出行方式及其应当遵循的交通规则。

五、Homework

1、学生背诵并抄写四会词语。

2、学生预习Let's talk 部分。教学后记:

第五课时

教学目标:

1、能够听懂、会说并能书写句型:”How Can I get to Zhongshan Park? You can go by the No.15 bus.“能够在情景中正确运用。

2、能够在对话中正确使用礼貌用语,比如:”Excuse me.Thank you.You're welcome.“等。教学重、难点:

1、重点是四会掌握句型:How Can I get to Zhongshan Park? You can go

By the No.15 bus.

2、难点是学生能够在实际情景中恰当地表达使用某一交通工具到达某一目的地。

课前准备:

1、教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。

2、教师准备一张简易地图,要能够呈现本校附近的一些建筑物。教学步骤:

一、热身(Warm-up)

(1)教师将全班学生分为两组,每组选派一名代表上讲台发指令。如:Green/red/yellow light,各组学生在座位上做动作,做错者坐下,即被淘汰,最后站着的人数多的组胜出。

(2)教师让学生用自己的话描述交通规则,表述正确者为小组争得一分,描述有新意者得三分,如:It's a yellow light,I must wait.Now the light is green,I can go.Don't go at a red light,a car may hit you.

二、预习(Preview)

Let's try

教师放Let's try部分的录音,学生听录音选择相应的图片。

录音内容如下:

Man:Excuse me.how can I get to Dongfang Primary School?

Zhang:You can g0 by the No.14 bus.It's next t0 the nature park.

Man:Thank you.

Zhang:You're welcome.

教师检查有多少学生能够准确区分14与40的发音,如果答对率低,教师要注意纠正。教师还可以板书一组相似的数字,如:13/30,18/80,15/50,教师说英文,学生说出中文的数字,帮助学生区分/-ti:n/与l-u/。

三、新课呈现(Presentation)

1、Let's talk

(1)教师根据学生平时常去的场所提问,如当地的一家电影院、风景点、或学生的祖父母家等:”How can you get to„?Can you go by„?Is it fast/slow/expensive t0 go by„?“进行师生间的自由会话,再让学生感知一下新句型:How can I/you get to„?然后,教师请学生根据课本中提供的地图回答问题:”How can I get to Zhongshan Park?“引导学生回答,提示他们坐15路公交车为:”By the No.15 bus.“教师提供完整的答句:”Yes.I can go by the No.15 bus.“教师板书这组句子。

(2)教师继续提问:”It's a place.You can buy food,drink,fruit,vegetables,school things and clothes there.What is it?(It's a supermarket.)“教师最好出示一张当地比较有名的超市的照片或图片来给出谜底。教师再提问:”How can I get

there? By bus or by bike?“然后领读句子:”I can go to the supermarket by„“帮助学生理解supermarket是一个合成词,来源于super与market。

(3)”你说我问“活动

该活动可以进一步巩固生词supermarket与句型”How can you get t0„?“教师先示范:”I usually go shopping in Hua Lian Supermarket.I like it.“引导学生提问: ”How can you get t0 the supermarket?“教师根据实际情况回答:I can go by the No.

bus.Sometimes I go by bike because it's not far.

(4)教师与学生一起继续学习地点名词,如:bank,post office,cinema,教师出示单词卡片引导学生初步认读生词。待学生能基本识别后请本上的配图,提问:”Where is the post office?“学生迅速指向课本相应位置并说:”It's here.“教师也可以通过变换提问方式来提高学性,如:”Can you see a fast food shop in the map?''让学生一边指地答。

(5)教师引导学生看地图,回答教师的提问:“How can I get to the bank/post office/

cinema„?''可先用短语回答,如:”By bike-/On foot_/By the No.15 bus.“再引导学生使用完整的句子回答问题。

(6)教师说:”Now let's listen to the tape and find out where Jim is going and how he can get there.'学生听该部分录音,回答问题。

(7)教师再次放该部分录音,学生跟读。

(8)学生两人一组看地图,替换关键词自编对话,(9)教师把组成四会句子的单词打散后发给学生,或者空缺出四会句子中的重点单词,请学生填四会句子。

2、Let's check

教师放录音,学生听录音完成判断题。

四、巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)

1、教师出示自制地图,请一名学生协助示范对话,然后让学生两人或三四人一组,编一个类似的对话并进行表演。

2、学生拿出上一课时布置的作业,即画一张从家里到学校(或从学校到家)的路线图,四人一组互相描述自己的路线。教师请几名学生以对话的形式汇报同组学生的情况:How do you go t0 school? I go on foot,because my home is near.

五、Homework 学生背诵并抄写Let's talk 部分。教学后记:

第六课时

教学目标:

1、能够读懂Let's read部分,并能判断短文后的句子是否正确。

2、帮助学生建立自觉遵守交通规则的观念,并了解不同国家交通规则的异同。

教学重,难点:

1、重点是帮助学生理解句型:In China/the US,drivers drive on the

right side Of the road.In England and Australia,however,drivers drive On the 1eft side Of the road.

2、难点是学生对文化差异的了解:在中国和美国等国家车辆靠右行驶,但在有些国家车辆靠左行驶,比如英国、澳大利亚、新加坡等地。课前准备:

1、教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。

2、教师在课前将写有usually,always,often,sometimes的纸条贴在教室的墙上。

3、教师课前在讲台前腾出一块空问,在地上画出模仿街道的分道线,为本课时活动做准备 教学步骤:

一、热身(Warm-up)

(1)教师说口令:“If you go by car, by bike or 0n foot,you must watch the traffic 1ights and know the traffic rules.Red!Yellow!Green!”学生听音做动作:stop,wait,go。教师不断变换速度,做错动作的学生出局。

(2)教师说动作词,学生说出相应的交通灯的颜色,比如:wait--yellow,go-green,stop-red,学生之问比一比,看谁的反应快。

二、预习(Preview)

教师举起左手,说:“This is my left hand.Show me your left hand!Then,show your right hand.”确定学生能够区分left和right后,请一小组学生上讲台,教师发出的指令做动作:“Turn left.Turn right.Turn back.”然后换另一小组,快做动作准确的小组获胜。

三、新课呈现(Presentation)

1、Let's read(1)教师站在课前画好的分道线的右侧,往前走,边走边说:“Now I'm walking on the right side of the road.I know the traffic rules.Do you think so?”教师重复并板书:“walk on the right side of the road”。老师再沿路的左侧往前走,请一名同学描述:“You are walking on the left side of the road”,老师板书句子:“walk on the left side of the road”。(2)教师接下来说:“In different countries, traffic lights are the same ,but the traffic rules are different.”请学生打开课本第九页,听录音。(3)学生阅读短文,完成文后的判断题。(4)教师领读句子,学生跟读。

2、Story time

(1)做B Let's play的游戏,请一名学生代替教师发指令:“stop,wait,go”,其他学生听指令做动作。教师说:“You are good children because you know the traffic rules.Let me do it.''然后教师故意做错几个动作,在学生提醒的时候,抓紧时机说:”I'm sorry.I am against the traffic rules.“然后板书:be against the traffic rules。

(2)教师放c Story time的录音,学生听录音回答问题:”Where do Zoom and Zip want to go? How do they go there?“

(3)学生打开学生用书第13页,教师提问:”Why don't they go by taxi? Why does

the policeman stop them?“学生读对话回答问题。

(4)教师放两遍录音,第一遍全班学生跟读,第二遍学生分角色跟读。

四、巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)

学生分组戴上头饰表。演A、B部分的对话和c部分的故事。教师注意启发学生的角色意识,尤其是扮演警察的学生要注意表演时的语气与神态需符合身 份。

五、Homework

1、学生背诵并抄写Let's read部分。教学后记:

Unit 2

Where is the science museum?

第一课时

Teaching aims:

1、能够听、说、读、写单词或短语:hospital,cinema,post office,bookstore

2、能够听、说、认读短语science museum。

3、能够听、说、认读句型:”Where is the library? It's near the post office.“并进行关键词的替换操练。

4、能够理解并会吟唱Let's chant的歌谣。

5、引导学生在学习过程中注重合作学习,利用课本中设计的Pair work,培养学生合作学习的意识。

Teaching importance and difficulties:

1、掌握Let's learn部分的四会单词和短语。

2、准确书写四会单词和掌握三会单词museum的发音。Preparations:

1、教师准备录音机、本课时的录音带

2、单词卡片 Procedures:

一、Warm-up

1、Game

2、Greeting: Today, I go to school on foot.What about you?

二、Presentation

1、Let's learn

listen and say

T: I want to post the letter.Where can I go?(post office)

Oh, I feel bad, I need to see a doctor.Where can I go?(hospital)

I'm ok now,I want to see a film, Where can I go?(cinema)

I need to buy some books, where can I go?(bookstore)

Where is the post office?(It's near the hospital.)

We also can say ”it's next to the hospital.“ Can you guess what meaning of ”next to“? It's the same as near.2、Let's chant

There are other two building.Look at this one,this is a science museum.the other one is library.In the map,there are 2 blanks A and B.Now, please guess where are they?

Sence: I want to go to the library, but I don't know how to get to the library? Can you help me?

Q: Excuse me,How can I get to the library?

A:

Q: Where is the library?

A:

三、Listen to the tape,read after it.1、Make dialogues

2、Next week, we will have a long holiday.I want to go to Beijing.I prepare a map.But it's too small, who can help me write it on Bb?

3、Do the same with partners.四、Homework

Copy the 4-skilled words, each 5 times.教学后记:

第二课时

Teaching aims:

1、能够听、说、认读主要句型:”Where is the cinema/post office/„,please ?It's next to the hospital/cinema/„Is it far from here? No,it's not far.“并能在实际情景中熟练运用。

2、能够书写四会句子:Where is the cinema,please ?It's next to the hospital.

3、能够听懂Let's try部分,并能根据录音内容选择正确的答案。

4、能够了解音标/e/,//,/k/,/g/,/f/,/v/,/s/,/z/的音与形;能够读出例词并选择音标与单词和配图正确连线。

5、继续学唱歌曲”Where Are You Going?“ Teaching importance and difficulties:

1、4-skilled sentences: Where is the post office/„,please? It's next to the hospital/cinema/„Is it f打from here ?No,it is not far.

2、/e/,//,/k/,/g/,/f/,/v/,/s/,/z/ Preparations:

1、教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。

2、学生准备好自己的城市设计图。Procedures:

一、Warm-up

1、Let's chant

2、Introduce ideal city

Let's Ss describe their cities in four-people groups, then let the best one introduce for the whole class.二、Preview

let's try

三、Presentation

Let's talk

(1)”模拟城市“

Teacher divides the class into eight parts, and each part has a name:cinema,hospital,post office,bookstore,library,school.T:”The cinema is here.The hospital is next to the cinema. The post office is next to the hospital.“

(2)Q:”Is there a cinema near here?“

S1:”No.there isn't.“

Q:”Is there a cinema near here?“

S2:”Yes,there is.“

Q:”Where is the cinema,please?“

S2: ”It's next to the hospital.“

Bb(Where is the cinema, please? It's next to the hospital.)

(3)shows the picture of the ”Let's talk“.T:”Is it far from here?“ pointing to a place.Ss:”No.“(No,it's not far)

(4)Listen to tape, and play in roles.(5)Write the 4-skilled sentences.四、Pronunciation

1、Listen to the tape and read after it.2、Read and match

3、Let's sing

”Where Are You Going?''

五、Homework

Write a passage about your ideal city.教学后记:

第三课时

Teaching aims:

1、能够理解并会朗读Let's read部分的对话;能完成排序练习。

2、能够使学生简单了解中、西方地图不同的标识。

Teaching importance and difficulties:

1、The dialogues in the Let's read.2、New sentences: What are you going to do after school? Get off at the cinema.Then walk straight for three minutes. Preparations:

1、Tape, tape-recoder

2、The pictures of Let's read and Good to know.Procedures:

一、Warm-up

1、Sing the song: “Where Are You Going?''

2、Greeting

T:How do you go to school?

S:I usually go to school by bike.

二、Preview

学生仿照Let's chant替换关键词语自编歌谣。

T:Where is your home?

Ss:It's near „.

三、Presentation

Let's read

(1)T:”School is over.I want to buy a pair of shoes after school.“

T:”What are you going to do after school?“

Ss: ”1 want to„“

Explain the ”going to„“

(2)教师出示街区图,图中有各种不同的建筑,如:医院、邮电局、鞋店、书店、图书馆、超市、电影院和学校。教师手指板板上的街区图,告诉学生自己所处的位置,然后提问,如:”Where is the hospital/post office„?Is it far from here?“等。学生抢答:”It's next to the„“可以分组比赛,也可以全班学生一起参与抢答,答对者予以鼓励。

(3)教师在街区图的学校和鞋店旁边分别加上一个站牌说”This is a bus stop.You can take the No.301 bus here.“教师继续利用街区图指出自己所在的位置:”Now I am at the school.I want to buy a pair of shoes.How Can I get to the shoe store?'学生会回答“You can go by the No.301 bus.”教师继续提问:“Where can I get off the bus?”一边问一边手指着shoe store的位置,提示学生回答:“Get off at the shoe store.”

(4)教师指着街区图继续提问:“Now I'm at the shoe store.How can I get to the„?”

根据地图所示选择离鞋店最近的直行可到的建筑物提问,引导学生回答:You Can go straight ahead.“教师表示肯定,说:”Yes!I can walk straight.“继续问学生:”Is it far from the shoe store?“学生回答:”No.“教师接下来说:Yes.It's not far.I walk straight for three minutes.Then I Can get to the„.”

(5)教师请学生阅读对话,回答以下问题:

What is Mike going to do? What is he going to buy?

Where is he going?

Where is the shoe store?

Which bus can he take?

Is the hospital on the right or left side of the road?

(6)学生课堂上完成排序任务。

(7)教师放Let's read部分的录音,学生跟读。

(8)学生两人一组分角色朗读对话。

Good to know

(1)教师出示Good to know部分的教学图,让学生知道如何使用地图以及要 注意的四个标识:1.The title 2.North pointer 3.Symbols 4.Scale。

(2)教师出示杭州、上海或者当地的城区图,请学生找出一些地名并判断距离的远近。

四、巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)

学生听A Let's read部分的录音并跟读,然后读给朋友或家长听。

五、Homework 学生背诵并抄写Let's read部分。

教学后记:

第四课时

教学目标:

1、能够听、说、认读四个方位词:south,east,west,north。

2、能够听、说、读、写短语:turn left,turn right,go straight。

3、能够听、说、认读句型:“How can I get to the museum ?Go straight for five minutes.Then turn left.”并能进行关键词的替换操练。

4、能够理解Story time的故事。教学重、难点:

1、重点是掌握四会短语:turn left, turn right, go straight.2、难点是straight的发音和拼写。教学准备:

1、教师和学生准备B Let's learn部分的单词卡片。

2、教师准备录音机、本课时的录音带。

3、.教师准备一张中国地图 教学步骤:

一、热身(Warm-up)

教师准备“兔子舞”的录音带。师生温习一下第一单元的“兔子舞”,跳的时候要注意强调单词left和right,师生一起跳一跳、乐一乐。

二、预习(Preview)

(1)“滚雪球”游戏

教师将有关公共场所的单词卡片贴在黑板上,第一名学生说一句话,如:I can see a hospital.第二名学生在后面加上一词,如:“I can see a hospital and a cinema.,每名学生都要比前面学生说的多加一个地点名词,这样依次进行.(2)学生两人一组进行问答操练,如:Where is the„? It's„Is it far from here?

三、新课呈现(Presentation)

Let's learn

I

(1)教师伸出两只手介绍说:”This is my left hand and this is my right hand.“请两名学生分别站在自己两侧介绍说:”A is on the left.B is on the right.“然后 提问一学生:”Where is A/B?“引导学生回答:”„is on the left/right.

(2)教师给自己发指令并做动作:Turn left.Turn right.Go straight ahead.

Let's play

教师准备一面彩旗和一块蒙眼布。将学生分成两大组,各组选派一名代表到上面。表示太阳慢慢从东方升起,教学east,要求学生注意ea字母组合的发音,提醒学生发音要到位。

(3)教师出示图片或照片,让学生猜测:“Where is it?”然后展示短语卡片学west。教师示范朗读,学生跟读。

(4)教师将课前准备的中国地图贴在黑板上介绍:“Tibet is in the west of China.Zhejiang is in the east of China.”教师边说边标出east和west,然后提问:“Where is Xiniiang?”教学north,教师领读该词,学生跟读,注意th字母组合的发音。教师再以同一方法教学south。教师发指令,请学生根据地图上“上北、下南、左西、右东”的方向标,听指令快速指方向,看谁反应快。

(5)“听一听、排一排”活动

每名学生拿出五张表场所的单词卡片,具体是哪五张卡片由教师指定。学生听教师发指令排出正确的位置,如教师可说:“The post office is west of the library.The cinema is east of the library.”等。此活动也可以在小组内进行,鼓励学生人人参与。

(6)教师出示museum的单词卡片,说:“1 want to get to the museum.Where is the

Museum ?How can I get to the museum?”教师板书:“How can I get to the museum?”示范朗读,学生跟读。

(7)教师放B Let's learn部分的录音,让学生认读单词并回答问题。

(8)教师出示本部分单词卡片,给学生10~15秒时间熟悉卡片,然后将单词盖上,学生以四人小组为单位看图抢读抢拼单词,拼读时小组成员可提供帮助。(9)教师可让学生在学生卡片背面的灰体词上描红,边描边拼读该单词或短语,看谁描得既快又好。如果做得不对,组内成员可以提醒。

四、巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)

(1)“优秀连队”活动

教师将学生分成4~6组,每组推荐一人当小军官,给组内成员发指令,如:“Turn right!Turn left!Go straight!”根据整组学生的表现选出优秀连队。

(2)教师先做示范,然后引导学生编歌谣如:Left hand,left hand,show me your left

hand.Right foot,right foot,stamp your right foot.(3)Story time

全班学生听Story time部分的录音,教师讲解故事内容,学生模仿跟读。教师让学生读一遍故事后回答相关的问题。学生分别说一说从故事中学习到了什么经验。

五、Homework:

学生抄写本部分的四会短语。教学后记:

第五课时

教学目标:

1、能够听、说、认读句子:“It's east of the cinema.Turn left at the cinema,then go straight.It's on the left.”并能在情景中进行运用。

2、能够四会掌握句子:Turn left at the cinema,then go straightoIt's on the left。

3、能够根据Let's try和Let's check部分的录音选出正确答案。教学重、难点:

重点和难点是使学生掌握句型:“It's east of the cinema oTurn left the cinema,then go straight.It's on the left.,并能在情景中熟练运用所学对话。还要能够正确书写其中的四会掌握句型:Turn left at the cinema,then go straight '。课前准备:

1、教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。

2、教学生两人一组准备一张中国地图。

3、老师和学生准备本课时的单词卡片。教学步骤:

一、热身(Warm-up)

(1)”寻宝藏“活动

教师课前为每名学生准备一张相同的迷宫图。请学生根据教师的描述的路线,如果标对了,他们将会得到”宝藏“。该活动也可以在两人组内进行。

(2)教师可适当修改刚才的寻宝藏路线图,引导学生依照新路线编对话并进行演示。

二、预习(Preview)

教师放录音,让学生按照录音内容选择正确的答案,对本单元的重要语言进行阶段性评价。

录音内容如下:

1、Boy:Where is the library,please?

Girl:It's not flar.You can go there by the No.18 buso

2、Boy:How can I get to the cinema,please?

Woman:Turn left from here.Then walk straight for 15 minutes.It's on the left

3、Girl:Where is the library,please?

Man:It's next to the post office.

4、Gid:Excuse me,how can I get to the science museumf

Boy:Take the No.15 bus.Get off at the science museum.You can l see lt.(1)Let's try

录音内容如下:

Boy:Excuse me,how Can I get to the science museum'?

Girl:Take the No.t2bus.Get off at the hospital.Then walk east for lOminutes

You can see the science museum.It's next to the cinemao

Boy:Thank you.

Girl:You're welcome.

(2)教师再放Let's tall时部分的录音,学生跟读。

(3)教师指导学生根据文字提示选出正确的路线。

三、新课呈现(Presentation)

(1)教师将Let's talk部分的教学挂图贴在黑板上说”1 want to go to the post office。

Where is the post office?“引导学生回答:”It's east/west/south/north of„。?

接着让学生看挂图,利用图上出现的场所替换关键词进行问答。

(2)“爱我中华”活动:

学生两人一组准备一张中国地图,进行问答,如:“Where is Jiangxi?It's east

0f Hunan.It's west of Zhejiang.It's south of Anhui.It's north of Guangdong.等。

(3)教师将学生分成六组,仿照教学挂图所示位置,把六张单词卡片(hospital,bookstore,park,post office,cinema,school)分发给各组,然后教师站在图中Amy的位置上,说:I want to go to the hospital.Where is it?”学生会说:“It's east of the park.''教师再问:”How can I get there?“引导学生说:”Turn left affil the cinema,and go straight.Then turn right at the post office and go straight-It's on the left.“学生跟读并进行一系列的替换练习。

(4)教师放B Let's talk部分的录音,学生跟读。

(5)学生两人一组,看地图,替换句型中的关键词自编对话,请几组学生表演

对话。

(6)教师引导学生书写四会句型。

四、巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)

1、学生做小组练习,再叫几名学生描述某一场所的位置,全班学生一起猜。

2、学生吟唱Let's chant部分的歌谣。

五、Homework

并抄写B Let's talk,并记会。

教学后记:

第六课时

教学目标:

1、能够理解并会朗读Let's read部分,能够完成选词填空练习。

2、能够完成Task time的任务。

3、能写简单的路线说明并了解写信的基本格式。教学重、难点:

重点和难点是能够听、说、认读句子:”Start from the bus stop.Get off of our school.Take the No.17 bus.Get off at the post office.Walk east for three minute.Find the white building on the left.Look for me near the door. 课前准备:

1、教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。

2、教师准备本课时的教学挂图。

3、教师准备一张邀请卡。教学步骤:

一、热身(Warm-up)

1、师生共唱歌曲“Ten Little Candles Dance.”

2、“优秀小警察”活动:。

教师将B Let's talk部分的教学挂图贴在黑板上说:“1 want to buy some books.Where can I go? How Can I get there?''请学生扮演小警察指路。师生一起评选出优秀小警察并给予奖励。

二、预习(Preview)

师生进行日常会话。以下问题可供参考:

How old are you? How do you go to school?

Which bus do you take?

Where is your home?

What's the colour of the building you live in?

三、新课导入(Presentation)

1、教师课前安排一名学生站在教室外面充当邮递员,上课铃响后,邮递员敲门递给教师一封信说:”There is a letter for you.“教师接过信,看了看信封说:”This letter is from Sarah.“然后从信封中取出一张邀请卡,说:”It's an invitation.What does it say?“教师请学生粗读段落,回答该问题。

2、教师出示教学挂图说”Yes,Look!It's Sarah's birthday.How old is she? Where is her home ?How Can we get to her home? Let's read again.“让学生带着问题阅读对话,提出不懂的单词或句子,教师答疑。

3、”过三关“活动

教师朗读Let's read部分,朗读时故意读错三处,请学生看课文听教师朗读,听到错误及时指出。如果所出现的三处错误没有被学生发现,则表明教师已闯过三关。

4、教师指导学生完成选择填空。

5、教师要求学生根据Sarah信中的说明,画出到她家的路线图。比一比谁画得既快又好。

6、教师事先准备课文当中指示路径的六个句子,随意打乱顺序,要求学生正确排序,看哪一组排得既快又准确。

四、巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)

1、Task time

教师引导学生仔细看Task time中的地图,观察各处场所的位置以及公交车路线。然后让学生两两分组依照对话泡中的示范语言询问和回答某场所的位置以及到达该场所的路线。教师可适当提示学生图中交通指示灯四周的场所都可步行到达;而museum和hospital则可乘一路公共汽车到达。

2、学生听录音、跟读本课的目标。

五、Homework 学生朗读Let's read部分。

教学后记:

Unit 3 What are you going to do?

第一课时

教学目标:

1、能够听、说、认读句型:”What are you going to do this evening? I'm going to the cinema.“并能对其中的动词和时间短语进行替换操练。

2、能够听、说、认读动词短语:take a trip,go to the cinema,read a magazine.

3、能够听、说、读、写时间短语:next week,this morning/afternoon/evening;并能够听、说、认读时间短语:tomorrow,tonight.

4、能够在Pair work中合理安排自己的活动时间并与他人进行交流。教学重、难点:

1、重点是能够听、说、读、写Let's learn部分的四会短语;并能替换going to do句型中的动词和时间短语对将来的活动进行表述。

2、难点也是四会词汇的听、说、读、写以及对be going to do句型了解和替换操练。免费下载绿色圃中小学教育网Http://www.xiexiebang.com 课件|教案|试卷|无需注册

课前准备:

1、教师准备动词短语卡片,如:take a trip,go to the cinema等。

2、教师准备教学课件。

3、教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。教学步骤:

一、热身(Warm-up)

1、教师课前放本单元歌曲”What Are You Going to Do?“学生初步感知be to do句型。

2、师生进行日常会话,可将重点放在动词短语的问答上。

二、预习(Preview)

1、教师出示课前准备好的课程表,说”Look!We have so many classes in a day指着Monday说:“What classes do we have on Mondays?''帮助学生一起说”On Mondays,we have English,Chinese,math.„“再请学生回答其他几个的课安排。

2、教师出示当天的日历,师生进行问答

3、”演一演、猜一猜“活动

教师准备好动词短语卡片,如:play spots,go hiking,do morning exercises. go to the cinema,take a trip,read a magazine等以及相关道具,如电影票、杂志、背包、太阳帽等。生抽出一张卡片,根据上面的图片或文字,用动作表现出来,其他学生猜什么短语。当有学生抽到新短语read a magazine时,教师可引他借助杂志来进行表演,其他学生由此可能会猜:read a book,教师借机引入新词magazine。教师可将take a trip留到最后自己表演,借助背包、太阳帽产生可能会猜出是go hiking,教师说:”No,I'm going to take a trip.,'引出新短语take atrip。教师可设立“最佳表演奖”来鼓励学生进行创造性表演,也可设立;'心有灵犀奖“来鼓励学生踊跃竞猜。

4、教师放课文的录音,学生静听一遍后跟读,(教师可对'I'm going to the cinema.”加以解释,语法规则见教学参考资料库。)随后学生两人一组进行练习,教师引导他们主动替换对话中的时间和动词短语,进行更为广泛的操练。

Pair work

教师出示Pair work部分的表格,说:Look!Here are some activities that are good for you.Please decide when you are going to do them and tell your partner.Pay attention:You can do them in two weeks.

学生先在表格中填人时间短语,然后进行结对操练。教师请几组学生演示对话。

四、巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)

1、学生抄写本课时的四会词汇。

2、学生以表格形式安排自己第二天的活动并向朋友或家人介绍。

3、学生跟录音学唱歌曲“What Are You Going to Do?”

五、Homework

1、学生朗读Let's learn部分的短语。

2、学生做本部分活动手册配套练习。

教学后记:

第二课时 教学目标:

1、能够听、说、读、写句型:What are you going to do on the weekend? I'm going to visit my grandparents this weekend.

2、能在Group work部分合理安排周末的旅游项目。

3、能够完成Let's try部分听录音判断对错的练习。

4、能够听懂、会唱歌曲“What Are You Going to Do?” 教学重、难点:

1、重点是学生能准确、自如地运用(并会书写)be going to do句型描述自己的活动计划与他人进行交流。

2、难点是听、说、读、写四会掌握句型:What are you going to do on

the weekend ?I'm going to visit my grandparents this weekend. 课前准备:

1、教师准备一张简明地图,图中标有ZOO,theme park,cinema,school,bookstore,post office,pet shop等场所。

2、教师准备一张当地的简明旅游图。

3、学生以四人为一小组准备当地的简明旅游图。

4、教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。教学步骤:

一、热身(Warm-up)

(1)教师课前放歌曲“What Are You Going to Do?”

(2)学生根据自己设计的表格向其他学生介绍自己一天的活动安排.二、预习(Preview)Let' try 教师说:“The National Day is coming.I have a friend in Shanghai.What is she goingto do? Let's listen to the tape and find out.”教师可分三次放录音,并根据学生的际情况有针对性地提问。学生听录音、回答问题并完成判断正误的练习。可供考的问题如下:

1、Where is she going?

2、How is she going there?

3、Who is she going with?

4、Is she happy?

5、What is she going to buy?

三、新课呈现(Presentation)

Let's sing

教师接着Let's try部分说:The girl is going to be doing on the National Day.She's very happy.Now let's listen to a song and find out what the children are going to do on Saturday.OK?

教师放C部分的歌曲,学生跟唱两遍后分师生、男女生或在小组间展开对唱。

Let's talk

1、对唱结束后,教师出示标有动物园、电影院等地点的简明地图,并圈出动物园所在位置,说:“The boy/girl(根据歌曲录音中的声音)is going to ZOO.His/her home is here.(教师指着地图中离动物园较远的某一地点)Is it far from the zoo?”学生回答:“Yes,it is far from the zoo.”教师再问:“How can he/she get to the zoo?”引导学生回答:“By bike/bus/taxi.”等。

2、教师放Let's talk部分的录音,学生跟读并分角色朗读。学生开展组与组之间的朗读比赛,教师鼓励学生对对话中的时间和地点进行替换。

3、教师出示打乱顺序的单词卡片,如:what ,do,going,are, the,to,you,weekend.又如:I,going,visit,to,am,my,this,grandparents,weekend。要求学生在最快时间内组合成句。师生一起拼读其中较难的单词如:weekend,grandparents,visit。

4、教师引导学生书写四会句型。

Group work

教师出示当地旅游图,师生可先就旅游景点自由会话,如:“Where is it ? How do you go there?”等。

然后教师布置任务Now you are a tour guide.Please write a schedule for this weekend.See who can design the best schedule for us.学生先在课文表格中写出自己的活动设计,并在小组内进行表述。组内推选出一名“最佳小导游”,如果时间允许还可举行全班性的比赛。

四、巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)

1、学生朗读本课时的对话。

2、学生抄写四会句子。

3、学生对自己的周末活动做出详细安排,并以表格形式写出。

五、Homework

1、学生将本单元的歌曲唱给家人或朋友听。

2、学生做本课时的配套练习。

教学后记:

第三课时 教学目标:

1、读Let's read中的段落,并根据段落内容写出提纲式的LiuYun's weekend plan.2、能够模仿文段内容陈述自己的周末活动安排。教学重、难点:

1、重点是阅读段落并根据段落内容进行第三人称的转述,掌握第三人称吋be going to do句型的用法。

2、难点是转述时第一人称与第三人称的人称代词与物主代词的变换。课前准备:

1、教师准备若干张表格(形式见教学过程说明)。

2、教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。教学步骤:

一、热身(Warm-up)

1、师生同唱歌曲“What Are You Going to Do?”

2、教师出示第二课时中the Great Wall,theme park和当地部分名胜及各种如bookstore,pet shop的图片(包括生词supermarket)。先请一名学生示范问答,如:What are you going to do this morning ?I'm going to visit the Great Wall.How do you get there? By train.„教师鼓励学生踊跃提问,而非师生间单向问答。

二、预习(Preview)

教师请几名学生介绍自己的周末安排。在学生介绍的过程中,教师可根据提出更细节性的问题,姐“When are you going to get up on Saturday? Where are you going on Saturday morning ?How are you going to the zoo?”等。在一名学生答之后,教师给予评价,如:“Wonderful!You're going to have a busy weekend,are you?”等,并向其他学生提问:“What is A going to do on Saturday morning? he is going with?”等,引导学生将第一人称改为相应的第三人称进行回答,生回答的内容以短语形式填人课前准备好的表格中.完成表格后,教师说:“Amy is going to have a busy weekend.”板书have:weekend,引导其他学生以“I'm going to have a busy weekend.”为开头介绍周末安排,并邀请其他学生做简单记录,对于其中涉及的非四会词汇或其他的词汇可师生一起拼写。

三、新课呈现(Presentation)

Let's read

1、在几名学生汇报完周末活动安排后,教师广泛而快速地询问其他学生:What are you going to do on Saturday/Sunday morning?“等,确认学生能正确使用句型:”I'm going to„“来回答。

2、教师接下来说“Liu Yun is going to have a busy weekend,too.What is she going to do? Please read the passage and answer my questions.”教师可以根据段落内容顺序设计问题,让学生朗读一遍课文后依次口头回答。

3、学生以小组为单位讨论并回答问题,如有不同答案,师生共同探讨,找出最佳答案。

4、教师放课文录音,学生跟读两遍后全班一起朗读,再自由朗读课文l一2遍。

5、学生独立填充Liu Yun's Weekend Plan,并在组内互相讨论,交流与校对。

四、巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)

1、学生模仿跟读Let's read的录音,并读给自己的同桌听。

2、学生模仿课文表述自己的周末活动安排。

五、Homework

1、学生做本部分活动手册的配套练习。

2、学生朗读Let's read部分。

教学后记:

第四课时 教学目标:

1、能够听、说、认读单词或词组:dictionary,post card,newspaper,magazine,comic book;并能够书写post card;newspaper和comic book。

2、能够听、说、认读句子:”What are you going to do? I'm going to buy an English book in the bookstore.When are you going? This afternoon.“并能进行关键词的替换练习。

3、能够用所学句型”What are you going to buy? I'm going to buy„“进行Let's play部分的购物活动。

4、能够听瞳并会吟唱Let's chant部分的歌谣。

5、能够了解音标/a:/,/A/,/el,/O/,/m/,/n/,/o/的音和形并会朗读相关例词;能够完成Read and match部分看图、读音标、辨词形后连线的练习。教学重、难点:

1、重点是听、说、读、写四会单词和短语。

2、难点是三会单词dictionary的发音、四会单词的拼写和Pronunciation 部分字母组合th的两种发音。课前准备:

1、教师准备本课时的单词卡片及不同科目的课本,如:English book,Chinese.。

等。

2、教师请学生帮助,模仿Let's play部分的插图在课前对教室进行布置。

3、教师自制Pronunciation部分的课件。

4、教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。教学步骤:

一、热身(Warm-up)

1、学生朗读Let's read的段落进行复习巩固。

2、学生陈述上节课后模仿课文设计的周末活动安排,教师根据其陈述内容提问其他学生,如:”What is he going to do on Saturday morning?“请他们回答,如:is going to„.

二、预习(Preview)

Let's chant

1、教师听完几名学生陈述后说:What a nice weekend!Now let's listen to the music and try to find out what the child is going to do today.教师用课件展示Let's chant的歌谣,然后放录音,学生看文字听,再跟节奏吟唱。

2、教师可简单解释歌谣中学生初次接触的短语,如take a sleep。师生根据歌谣内容进行问答,如:Are you going to buy a book/bake a cake ?Yes,I am.三、新课呈现(Presentation)

Let's learn

1、教师继续Let's chant部分的提问:“Are you going to buy a book,too?”在有生回答”Yes,I'm going to buy a book.“或”Yes,I am.“后教师再问:”Where do you buy a book?“学生回答:”In a bookstore.“

2、教师接着提问:”What books can you buy in a bookstore?”启发学生回忆学过的书籍词汇,如:English book,Chinese book,math book,music book,science book等,学生回答出一种书,教师即出示一本该书的实物,把它们一一放下,师生一起拼写这些单词。

3、教师可通过继续出示实物的方式,依次呈现生词:comic book,dictionary,newspaper,post card,也可通过与story-book的比较呈现comic book;还可用简单的英语进行解释,请学生猜是哪个生词,如:“Dictionary:In this kind of book。we can find many new words.It is helpful to us.Post card:When New Year's Day is coming,we often send them to our friends.”在呈现过程中,师生一起拼读生词中的四会单词。

4、学生进行单词拼写比赛,可以口头进行,看谁既快又好,以帮助记忆本课时四会单词。

Let's play

教师布置学生课前每人带2-3本图书并布置好5-6处“卖书点”(仿照课文Let's play中的插图)。每处“卖书点”由2-3名学生担任销售人员,其他学生自由购书。教师先与学生进行示范对话,可结合前几册学生用书中所学有关购物的句型对话进行拓展.

Let's learn

教师放Let's learn部分的录音,学生跟读后对其中的书籍名词和时间短语进行替换练习。

Pronunciation

1、教师出示Pronunciation部分的课件说:Look!I have a dictionary.You Can find many new words in it.Can you read them?教师呈现Pronunciation部分的音标和单词,放录音,让学生仔细听,感知音标的音与形。然后教师示范朗读,学生跟读。尤其是th的两种发音,教师应请学生仔细对照口型模仿朗读。

2、Read and match

学生跟读录音2-3遍后独立完成连线练习。

四、巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)

1、学生抄写本课时四会词汇。

2、学生朗读Pronunciation部分的例词,并试着找出更多的例词,五、Homework

1、学生吟唱Let's chant部分的歌谣。

2、学生做本部分的配套练习。

教学后记:

第五课时

教学目标:

1、能够听、说、认读what,where,when引导的特殊疑问句并能做出相应回答。

2、能够听、说、读、写四会句子:Where are you going this aftenoon? I'm going

bookstore.What are you going to buy ?I am going to buy a comic book.

3、能够听懂Let's try部分的对话并完成听音选图的练习。

4、能够使用各种疑问句釆访他人的活动安排并做记录。教学重、难点:

1、教学重点是三个特殊疑问句的问与答以及各种信息的替换和交流。

2、教学难点是学生能运用what,where,when疑问句进行真实的交际。课前准备:

1、教师准备一张简明地图,标出bookstore,shoe store,fruit stand,pet shop等场所。

2、教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。

3、教师课前在黑板上画出表格。教学步骤:

一、热身(Warm-up)

1、全班一起吟唱Let's chant的歌谣。

2、单词拼写竞赛:

要拼写的单词包括:this morning/afternoon/evening,next week,newspaper,postcard等。可采取小组合作的“接龙式”拼写形式;也可以选取组内一名学生拼写全部单词。拼出单词最快最多的组获胜。

3、教师出示简明地图,师生问答如下:

r:What shop is it?

s:It's a bookstore.

r:What can you buy in the bookstore?

s:

在学生回答各商店所出售的物品时,教师根据其回答在黑板上写出单词。

二、预习(Preview)

Let's try

教师指着地图中的商店及各商店所出售的物品说:Look!There are so many stores and so many goods.Let's listen to the tape and find out:①Where is Sarah going? ②What is she going to buy? ③Who is she going with?教师放三遍Let's try部分的录音,以上问题可根据学生的实际情况分三次提出,直到多数学生能回答并能将前两项答案填人教师课前画出的表格中。在填表过程中,教师请学生一起拼写其中的四会单词,如:bookstore,comic book。

三、新课呈现(Presentation)

Let's talk

1、“我的购物计划”活动

教师指着黑板上的简明地图及表格说:Look,Sarah and Chen J1e are going to bookstore.Where are you going? What are you going to buy? When are you going?

Please write a shopping plan.指导学生结合表格中的购物地点、时间及商品三项提示,根据自己的购物;制定一个购物计划,组内学生可以互相交流讨论。

学生做好计划后,师生根据表格中的三点要求:where,what,when进行提问。

教师先与几名学生进行上述对话,再由学生提问来获知教师的购物计划由学生将有关信息填人表格中。学生两人一组互相了解对方的shopping plan,灵活运用where,when,what导的三个疑问句互相提问和回答。

2、教师放课文的录音,学生静听后跟读,再分角色朗读。

3、学生两人一组根据课本上的替换图对对话中的各种信息进行替换,教师 指导,并请几组学生进行示范。

4、教师引导学生进行四会句子的书写。

Pair work

1、学生两人一组相互采访,根据表格中提供的三个疑问句了解同伴当天下午活动安排(不一定是购物),并简要记录信息。

2、教师请几组学生在班级内演示采访过程。教师可对采访者的采访记录进行调查和评价,也可在非同桌的学生之间展开互评。

四、巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)

1、学生抄写本课时的四会句子。

2、学生课后对父母或朋友的近期活动进行采访,记录结果交给教师。

3、学生吟唱本单元的歌谣。

五、Homework

1、学生抄写Let's talk部分1+1,并记会。

2、学生做本部分配套练习。

教学后记:

第六课时 教学目标:

1、能够听、说、认读Let's read部分的对话。

2、能够根据对话内容回答文后的问题。

3、能够就自己20年后的理想状况进行讨论。

4、能够理解Good to know部分的内容。

5、能够完成Let's check部分听音选图的练习。教学重、难点:

重点和难点是听、说、认读Let's read部分的对话。课前准备:

1、教师准备各种职业的单词卡片,如:soldier,doctor,nurse,farmer,English teacher,Chinese teacher,science teacher等。

2、教师准备关于文字记载方式的发展演变的课件。

3、教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。教学步骤:

一、热身(Warm-up)

1、师生一起吟唱Let's chant部分的歌谣。

2、教师出示各种职业的单词卡片,与学生进行问答:“What is he/she? He's/

She's a doctor.”等。教师把职业单词写在黑板上。

二、预习(Preview)

Task time

1、教师指着黑板上各种职业的单词说:“Everyone has a dream.What are you

going to be in the future? Discuss with your partner.”引导学生使用“I'm going

to be a„”进行分组讨论,教师指导并适当记录学生的讨论情况。

2、教师与学生快速问答,如:

r:What are you going to be one day?

s:I'm going to be a teacher.

r:Oh,you want to be a teacher.(每项问答后教师都用这句话做总结,也可逐

步引导学生使用句型“1 want to be„”进行回答。)

三、新课呈现(Presentation)

Let“s read

1、教师进行总结说:”You're great.You have many wonderful dreams.Sarah has a wonderful dream ,too.What is she going to be one day? What is she going to do this weekend? Let's read a dialogue.“学生仔细阅读对话,教师走动答疑。

2、教师请学生简要回答刚才提出的两个问题,如:”A science teacher.Plant trees.“ 然后师生间自由会话:”Do you want to be a science teacher?''教师根据学生的回答继续提问:“Do you like plants ?Are you going to plant any~ees?”教师作出思考的表情,停顿一下说:“What else? Let me see.„”然后做出想起的样子,问:“Are you going to read any magazines about plants?Do you need magazines about plants?''教师板书a magazine about patoto师生自由会话后一起朗读文后提出的问题,学生再带着问题默读或朗读;同桌之间或组内同学可以互相讨论问题的答案并在横线上书写答句。

4、教师请学生回答问题,全班进行核对。教师提醒学生注意拼写准确、书写规范。

5、教师放课文的录音,学生跟读后全班一起朗读,然后分角色朗读。

Good to know

教师引入该部分教学:Some of you want to be Chinese teachers.So you should know something about the history of Chinese writing.教师借助资料片介绍该部分,扩充学生的知识面。

四、巩固和延伸

(Consolidation and extension)

Story time

教师说:Zoom has a dream,Let's watch the VCD.too.He wants to learn how to swim.How does he learn?教师放Story time的课件并放故事的录音。论故事的涵义,体会”Learn by doing.“的道理。

Let's check

教师放该部分录音,学生听录音选出正确选项。

五、Homework

1、学生朗读Let's read部分。

2、学生做本部分配套练习。

教学后记:

Recycle 1 第一课时 教学目标:

1、能够听、说、认读Let's read I部分的对话并能完成文后判断正误的练习。

2、能够根据Let's find out的提示语言在地图中找到并写出对应的公共场所。

3、能够听懂、会唱歌曲”How Can I Get to the Zoo?'' 教学重、难点:

1、重点是第一、二单元主要语言的巩固和拓展。

2、难点是Let's find out部分根据提示语言在地图上确认并书写相应的公共场所。

课前准备:

1、教师准备一张标有post office,pet shop,hospital,park,Zoo等场所的简明地图课件。

2、教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。教学步骤:

一、热身(Warm-up)

1、全班一起吟唱第一单元Let's chant的歌谣。

2、师生进行自由会话:How do you go to school ? I go by„

3、教师用红笔在简明地图上标出某一地点,如:A,说:“Now we are here.can I get to the park/cinema/pet shop?”请学生一边指地名,一边说明路。如:“Go straight.It's next to the post office.”教师还可标出其它地点,如B等,请学生指路。

二、预习(Preview)

教师手指简明地图上的某一地点,说:“Now we're here.We're going to the park.Is it far from here?”引导学生根据地图上的距离回答。教师继续提问:“How can we go to the park?”学生可提出不同建议,如:“We can go by bike/bus.等。

三、新课呈现(Presentation)

Let's read

1、教师说:”Amy and Chen Jie are going to the park ,too.How do they go to the park? Let's read the dialogue.“教师引导学生阅读对话,回答问题。

2、教师用幻灯呈现Let's read I对话下面判断正误的练习。师生一起朗读问题,让学生打判断正误,再朗读对话或听录音,校对答案。

3、学生自由朗读或分组分角色朗读本部分对话。

Let's find out

1、在学生分组朗读后,教师说:Amy and Chen Jie are in the park now.The park has a pet shop,an ice-skating area and a ping-pong area.What else? Let's read and find out.教师指导学生阅读文中的指示语言,并确定平面图的四个方向,学生独立或两人一组讨论完成填图练习。

2、师生以对话形式来核对答案。

Let's sing

1、教师说:”The park is very interesting.Now let's go to the zoo.指着简明地图中的动物园,问:“It's far from the park.How can I get to the zoo?'请学生自由回答:”By bike/car„“

2、教师放歌曲”How Can I Get to the Zoo?“学生看歌词静听,然后跟唱2~3遍。

四、巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)

1、学生听录音,跟读本课时对话。

2、学生进行课外讨论:How can we get to the zoo?

五、Homework

1、学生朗读Let's read部分。

2、学生做本部分配套练习。

教学后记:

第二课时 教学目标:

1、能够听、说、认读Let's read II部分的对话并能完成对话后判断正误的练习。

2、能够综合运用1~3单元的主要语言;能听懂Listen and choose部分的对话。

3、能够熟练运用be going to do句型讨论自己的梦想之旅。教学重、难点:

1、重点是1~3单元的综合复习,尤其是复习巩固be going to do句型。

2、难点是学生能够运用前三个单元的语言灵活有效地进行交流。课前准备:

1、教师准备一张简明城市交通图和若干面小彩旗。

2、学生课前对放学后的活动做出简单计划并进行表述。

3、教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。教学步骤:

一、热身(Warm-up)

1、全班齐唱歌曲”How Can I Get to the Zoo?''

2、学生四人一组分角色朗读Let's read I部分的对话。

二、预习(Preview)

“探路先锋“游戏

教师准备一张自制简明地图,以及若干面小彩旗。教出示交通图,在图中标出若干个地点,如A、B、C等,请两名学生到地图前,持一面彩旗。教师给出指示语,如:”I'm at Point A,I go straight from A.Then turn left at the traffic lights.Where am I?“教师的指示语应清晰、准确,可由简至难步步推进。能够率先将彩旗贴至教师所述位置的为”探路先锋“,教师给予奖励。

三、新课呈现(Presentation)

1、“我是实习小交警”活动

教师准备一张简明城市交通图和一顶交警帽。学生两人一组,分别扮演交警与问路者,可进行如下对话:

A:Good morning,sir_ Where is the post office,please?

B:Go straight.Turn right at the hospital.It's on the left.„

A:Thank you.

若问路者及其他学生能根据“交警”的指示语顺利找到目的地,则“实习“小交警晋升为“正式”小交警,教师颁发给交警袖章或其他奖励品。

2、教师说:“Now we know the city very well.I'm going to„this afternoon.Where

are you going ?What are you going to do after school?”与学生展开如下对话:

T:What are you going to do after school?

S:I'm going to the„.

T:Where is the„?

3、Let's read II

教师可接着学生的回答提问:“What is A going to do this afternoon?”学生回答后,教师继续提问:“What are Zhang Peng and Mike going to do this afternoon? Do you want to know? Let's read the dialogue.”教师指导学生仔细阅读对话,回答提出的问题。师生一起朗读对话后判断正误的句子。

4、Listen and choose

教师接着Let's read部分说:Zhang Peng and Mike have their plans.Now let's listen and find out what John and Wu Yifan are going to do this afternoon.

教师放三遍录音,第一遍请学生静听,初步理解;第二遍请学生听音选图;第三遍请学生进行自我检查。如果时间允许,也可要求学生最后跟读一遍录音。

5、Group work

学生分组讨论自己想象中的假期并填写该部分表格。教师可鼓励学生课后将自己的梦想之旅写成短文(连贯的3~4个句子即可)参加评比,师生一起评选出七副作品在班级内展示。

四、巩固和延伸(consolidation and extension)

学生书写并修改有关My Dream Vacation,的段落,交给教师进行评选。

五、Homework

1、学生朗读Let's read II部分的对话。

2、学生做本部分配套练习。

教学后记:

第三课时 教学目标:

1、能够进一步综合运用l~3单元的主要语言进行有实际交际意义的会话;能够听懂Listen and match的对话并完成连线练习。

2、能够理解并会吟唱Let's chant的歌谣。

3、能够认读l~3单元Pronunciation的音标并能把音标和相关例词正确连线。教学重、难点:

1、教学重点是学生对前三个单元主要语言的正确理解和有效运用。

2、教学难点是音标部分,要综合复习前三单元学过的音标,使学生能把音标和相关单词正确连线。课前准备:

1、教师准备前三个单元所学音标的卡片。

2、教师课前选一篇学生所做My Dream Vacation的短文,根据其内容仿照本课歌谣编创一首新歌谣。

3、教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。教学步骤:

一、热身(warm-up)

1、全班齐唱歌曲“How call I Get to the Zoo?''

2、师生一起吟唱第一单元的歌谣,要求学生一边吟唱,一边用手打节拍。

二、预习(Preview)

教师对学生有关My Dream Vacation的短文做出总体评价,并请几名写得有创意的学生朗读他们的短文,教师针对其内容提问,如:”Where are you going? What are you going to do? How are you going to there等。教师根据课前的准备,在最后一名学生朗读完文章并回答了问题以后,简化并板书该学生的回答,将其改编成为一首小歌谣,如:

Where are you going? What are you going to do?

I'm going to the Zoo to see the monkeys.

I'm going by bike.I'm going On foot.

I live near the Zoo.So I won't take a train.

教师拍节拍示范朗读自己改写的新歌谣,学生模仿吟唱新歌谣。

三、新课呈现(Presentation)

Let's chant

在以上活动的基础上,教师放Let's chant部分的录音,学生静听并试着跟读,再看着文字吟唱。师生可进行问答式吟唱,并在小组间展开比赛。

Listen and match

教师说:“Now let's to find out:Where are John, Mike,Chen Jie and Sarah going this weekend? How are they going ?Let's listen!”教师放三遍录音,第一遍请学生静听,初步理解;第二遍请学生听音选图;

Read and match

1、“眼疾手快“游戏

教师准备前三单元的音标卡片,把它们贴在黑板上。教师把学生分成四大组,每组各派一名代表上台,教师念出一个音标,最快认出并将它拿到手里的学生获胜。最后拿到音标卡片最多的学生获胜。

2、教师出示l~3单元Pronunciation部分某些例词的音标,请学生朗读。再让学生独立完成Read and match部分的练习,全班核对。

四、巩固和延伸(consolidation and extension)

1、学生朗读l~3单元Pronunciation的音标和例词。

2、学生跟录音吟唱Let's chant的歌谣。

五、Homework 学生综合复习l~3单元的语言。

教学后记:

Unit 4 I have a pen pal 第一课时 教学目标:

1、能够听、说、认读句子:What is your hobby? I like collecting stamps.2、能够听、说、读、写动词短语的ing形式:collecting stamps,riding a bike,31 diving,playing the violin,making kites。教学重、难点:

1、教学重点是掌握五个动词(短语)的ing形式。

2、教学难点是拼写:riding,diving,making。课前准备:

1、教师准备录音机及录音带。

2、教师准备A部分Let's learn的单词卡片。

3、教师准备一些树叶、一本集邮册、两只风筝。

4、学生准备A部分Let's learn的单词卡片。教学步骤:

一、热身(Warm-up)

教师放五年级下册Recycle 2的歌曲”I Love Going Hiking“,学生边唱边跟教师倘相应的动作。

二、预习(Preview)

”滚雪球“游戏

教师边出示各种形状的树叶,边说:”I like collecting leaves.“请一名学生在句子基础上再加一句话,如:”I like collecting leaves.I like taking pictures.依次类推,看谁说出的句子最多。

三、新课呈现(Presentation)

Let's start

教师与一名学生示范。教师问:“What's your hobby?”学生回答:“Swimming.What about you?”教师回答后示范填写Let's start部分的表格。同桌或前后两名学生之间进行问答、填表。

Let's learn

1、教师边做动作边说自己的业余爱好:“I like playing the violin.What is your hobby?”引导学生回答:“I like„”教师板书:What is your hobby? I like playing the violin.指导学生拼读hobby,playing the violin并进行问答操练。

2、教师拿出集邮册,从里面取出一张邮票,问学生:“What's this?”引导学生回答:“It's a stamp.”教师板书stamp并带读。教师展示集邮册,同时说:“I like

collecting stamps.”然后板书并带读collecting stamps。教师问:“Do you like

collecting stamps?”,引导学生作答后拼读并操练:I like collecting stamps.

3、教师做骑自行车的动作,问:“What am I doing?”学生猜:“You're„教师说:”Yes,I am riding a bike.I go to work by bike every day.I like riding a bike.教师板书:riding a bike,指导学生拼读,告诉学生riding是ride去掉结尾不发音的e再加上ing。

4、教师出示一只风筝,问:“What's this?”引导学生回答:“It's a kite.”教师出示两只风筝,问:“What are they?”引导学生回答。接着教师做放风筝的动作,问:“What am I doing?”学生回答:“You're flying a kite.”教师回答:“Yes,I like flying kites.I can make kites.I like making kites,too.”然后出示making kites的单词卡片,问:“What's he doing?”引导学生回答:“He's making kites.板书:making kites,学生拼读,注意making的拼写。

5、教师出示diving的单词卡片,问:”What is he doing?“引导学生回答:He's diving.教师板书:diving,学生拼读,注意diving的拼写。

6、教师手指板书,学生齐拍手练习说句子,如:What is your hobby? What is

your hobby? Playing,playing,I like playing the violin.Collecting,collecting,I like collecting stamps.Riding,riding,I like riding a bike.Making,making,I like making kites.Diving,diving,I like diving.

7、教师放Let's learn部分的录音,学生跟读。教师出示 Let's learn部分的单词卡片,学生根据单词卡片内容进行问答操练:What is your hobby?I like--

8、”猜一猜“游戏

学生拿出A Let's learn部分的单词卡片。同桌一组,每人抽出一张单词卡作为自己的爱好,一人猜:”You like„“另一名学生根据手中卡片上的内容回答:”Yes/No.I like„“两人可进行积分比赛,猜对卡片上的内容就得到这张卡片,最后看谁手里的卡片最多。

Group work

学生带好纸笔在组内进行调查,互相询问:“What is your hobby?''调查完毕,各组派代表上台汇报调查结果:“„boys/girls like„”也可说出名字,如:“„and„l ike„ “若课上时间不够,可将调查活动放到课后进行,下一节课汇报。

四、巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)

1、让学生做本单元A Let's learn部分的配套练习。

2、让学生听Let's learn部分的录音,读给同桌听。

五、Homework

1、让学生背诵并抄写本课四会动词(短语)

2、预习Let's talk部分。

教学后记:

第二课时 教学目标:

1、能够听、说、读、写句型:What's your hobby? I like collecting stamps.He likes collecting stamps,too.

2、能够认读音标:/3:/,/a/,/J、/,/3/,/l/,/r/,并能朗读Pronunciation部分例词。教学重、难点:

1、教学重点是句型:What's your hobby? I like collecting stamps.He likes collecting stamps,too.

2、教学难点是在实际情景中正确运用句型:He/She likes„ 课前准备:

1、教师准备录音机及录音带。

2、教师准备A Let's learn部分的单词卡片。

3、教师准备Pronunciation部分的课件。

4、教师准备各种展览活动的报刊。

5、教师准备一些名人照片。教学步骤:

一、热身(Warm-up)

1、连锁问答操练。教师对一名学生说:”I like„,What's your hobby?“该学生回答后向别的学生提问,依次进行。

2、教师出示A Let's learn部分的单词卡片和五年级下册第四、五、六单元

Let's learn部分的单词卡片,同桌根据卡片开火车问答操练,如:What's your hobby? I like„.

二、预习(Preview)

1、教师放A Let's learn部分的录音,学生跟读并拼读动词短语。

2、“看谁反应快”游戏

教师请六名学生上台站成一排,每人手持一张A Let's learn部分的单词卡片,一名学生首先用本部分的一张卡片上的短语说一个句子,如:I like diving.捉住有diving单词卡片的学生则立即向前迈一步,根据其它五张卡片的内容说一个名子,如:I like playing the violin.如果句子正确,则可以退回到原来位置,如果句子有误或反应慢就要退出游戏。

三、新课呈现(Presentation)

Let's try

学生听录音,做练习。

Let's talk

1、教师课前在教室的墙上贴上各种海报,教师手指墙上画展的海报说:“There is a painting show Saturday.I like painting.I am going to the show.What else likes painting? Who would like to go with me?”有学生举手,教师则手指该名学生说:“I like painting.He/She likes painting,too.”接着教师手指邮票展的海报说:“There is a stamp show Sunday.I like collecting stamps,too.Do you?”有学生举手,教师说:“He/She likes collecting stamps,too.”板书:He likes collecting stamps,too.(板书likes中的s可以用不同颜色标出,以突出重点。)学生跟读,然后开火车进行造句练习:He/She likes„

2、教师放Let's talk部分的录音,学生跟读、分角色朗读。

3、学生指着墙上的海报进行对话操练。

请同桌学生依次起立汇报:I like„„likes„如果两人的爱好刚好相同,可以接着说,“We can go to the„show together.”教师及时指导、纠错。

4、教师指导学生拼写四会句子。鼓励学生将上一步骤中的汇报内容记录下来。

Let's play

1、教师请六、七名学生上台站成一排,第一名学生A向前迈出一步说:“I like„然后退回原处,第二名学生B迈出一步说:”A likes„I like„“,接下来第三名学生c迈出一步说:”A likes„B likes„I like„“,依次进行。

2、教师用实物投影仪展示一些名人照片,如:运动员、歌唱家、收藏家等,生抢答:”He/She likes„“ “老师的爱好”游戏

教师将学生熟悉的六位教师的名字写在黑板上。全班学生分成六组,每组负责讲述其中的一位教师。一组描述,其他的小组猜他描述的是哪位教师。要求首先要描述教师的爱好,如果其他小组猜不出,再继描述教师的体貌特征等,直到其他学生猜出教师名字为止。

Pronunciation

1、教师出示Pronunciation部分的挂图,带领学生认读音标:/3:/,/3/,/1/,/r/。带读例词,指导学生归纳发音规律。学生听录音跟读。

2、教师指导学生完成Read and match的练习。

3、“摘星星”游戏

学生分成两队,每队站一列。教师在黑板上贴一颗大红星,依次出示单音节音标词的单词卡片,如:/si:/,/red/等,两队的第一名学生抢先起立读单词。最先拼出的学生得到一颗星,最后哪队得到的星星最多就可以赢得大红星。

四、巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)

1、做本单元A Let's talk部分的配套练习。

2、让学生听Let's learn,Let's talk部分的录音,读给同伴听。

五、Homework

1、让学生背诵并抄写Let's talk部分。

2、预习Let's read部分

教学后记:

第三课时 教学目标:

1、能够听、说、认读Let's read中的两封电子邮件。

2、了解一些有关英语信封书写的知识。

3、能够听懂、会唱歌曲“My Pen Pal”。教学重、难点:

1、教学重点是阅读Let's read中的两封电子邮件。

2、教学难点是能理解、认读句子:My twin sister Ann likes drawing picture and making kites.We look the same,but we don't like the same things.Tell me something about you. 课前准备:

1、教师准备录音机及录音带,课件。

2、教师准备A Let's learn部分的单词卡片和五年级下册第四、五、六单元Let's 1earn部分的单词卡片。

3、教师准备一个用汉语书写的信封与一个用英语书写的信封。教学步骤:

一、热身(Warm-up)

1、上课前教师播放歌曲“My Pen Pal''的录音,让学生跟录音轻声哼唱。

2、教师放五年级下册第四单元B Let's chant部分的歌谣录音,学生听录音边动作边说唱歌谣。

二、预习(Preview)

1、教师放A Let's learn和Let's talk部分的录音,学生跟读。

2、教师出示A Let's learn部分和五年级下册第四、五、六单元Let's learn部分动作单词卡片,同桌开火车操练句型:What is your hobby? I like„

3、“抢答”游戏 学生分成两组。每组轮流派一名代表上台抽卡片表演卡片上的动作,本组其他学用“He/She likes„”句型猜卡片上的内容,如果猜出就可以得分。

三、新课呈现(Presentation)

Let's read

1、教师问:“Do you remember Dalin,Xiaolin,Zhang Shu and Zhang Ren? They are twins.They look the same.Today,you'll get to know two more twins.”然后教师出示本部分的课件,指着图画上的两个外国小姑娘说:“Look at the two

girl.This girl has long hair.That girl has long hair,too.This girl has big eyes.That girl has big eyes,too.They look the same.What is she doing? She's drawing picture.What about the other girl? What is she doing? She's writing an e-mail.What are hobbies? Now let's read an e-mail.''然后学生打开课本仔细阅读第一封电子邮件。

2、教师放本部分第一封电子邮件的录音,学生仔细听的同时再细读一遍电子邮件。然后教师说几个句子,请学生判断正误。

Liu Yun is Alice's new pen pal.

Alice likes swimming,diving and making kites.

Alice's twin sister Ann likes drawing pictures.教师再放一遍录音,学生跟读然后核对答案。

3、教师说:”We all know Liu Yun is Alice's friend now.Liu Yun writes an e-mail to Alice.Let's read her reply.Please read the mail and tell me something about Liu Yun.“学生翻开课本阅读第二封电子邮件。读完后请学生试着说一说刘芸的爱好及家庭情况。

4、教师放第二封电子邮件的录音,学生跟读。教师指导学生完成Answer the questions的练习。教师再放一遍录音,学生核对答案。

5、如果时间允许,教师简要介绍一下英文电子邮件的格式。

Group work

1、学生进行小组内调查,问:”What is your hobby?''并可将对方的业余爱好简单记录下来。

2、学生进行汇报:“„likes„”,师生可共同评选出班里爱好最广泛的学生。

Goodtoknow

教师带读Good to know中有关英语信封各部分名称的词汇,让学生说说含义,然后教师出示一个汉语信封与一个英语信封,让学生进行比较。教师介绍一些相关知识。

Let's sing

1、教师放歌曲“My Pen Pal''的录音,学生先仔细听录音,然后跟教师读歌曲。

2、学生跟录音学唱歌曲。

四、巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)

1、让学生做本单元A Let's read部分的配套练习。

2、让学生听A部分的录音,读给同伴听。

五、Homework

1、让学生抄写本单元A Let's read部分,并背诵。

2、预习B部分let's learn部分。

教学后记:

第四课时 教学目标:

1、能够听、说、读、写五个动词的第三人称单数形式:lives,teaches,goes,watches,reads。

2、能够听、说、认读句子:Does your pen pal live in Shanghai? No,he doesn't.He lives in Beijing.

3、能够听懂、说唱歌谣”Tell me about your pen pal“。

4、能够听懂、理解Story time中的故事。教学重、难点:

1、教学重点是听、说、读、写掌握五个动词的第三人称单数形式。

2、教学难点是区别使用后缀s和es。课前准备:

1、教师准备录音机及录音带。

2、教师准备A、B部分let's learn的单词卡片。

3、教师准备一些动物单词卡片和第一单元Let's learn部分的单词卡片。

4、教师准备Story time部分的课件和一只玩具猴。教学步骤:

一、热身(Warm-up)

1、教师放第一单元Let's sing部分的歌曲”How Do You Go to School?“,学生听录音齐唱。

2、教师放歌曲”My Pen Pal“,学生听录音齐唱。

二、预习(Preview)

1、教师出示A Let's learn部分的单词卡片,同桌开火车拼读动词短语。

2、教师放A Let's read部分的录音,学生跟读。

3、师生对话。

三、新课呈现(Presentation)

1、教师板书:live,然后指着自己说:”I live in„ Where do you live in?''引导学生作答后教师出示一张动物单词卡片,如:fish,问:“What is this?''引导学生作答。教师继续问:”Does it live in the sky?“引导学生回答:”No,it doesn't.it lives in rivers.回答时教师有意强调lives的发音。教师在黑板上的live后加上s。教师依次拿出其它动物的单词卡片,用一般现在时的一般疑问句形式就动物的住所提问,引导学生作答。教师再问:“Does your father/mother/pen pal live in„?引导学生给出肯定或否定回答。教师板书:Does your father/mother/pen pal live in Shanghai? No,he doesn't.He fives in Beijing.教师向学生展示lives单词卡片,带读单词。

2、教师说:I teach English.Does Mr„teach English?”引导学生作答:“No,he doesn't.He teaches„,”教师板书:teaches(es可用另一种颜色标出),然后再用几位其它学科的教师的名字提问,引导学生给出完整回答。

3、教师说:“I go to work by bus.How do you go to school?''引导学生回答: go to school by„“教师继续问:“How does your father go to work? Does you go to work by bus?”引导学生作答后板书:goes to work。教师继续提问几名学生:“Does your father/mother go to work by„?“引导学生作答。随后教学watches和reads。教师指导学生拼写单词。建议教师引导学生比较动词原形和其第三人称单数形式,并用这两种形式造句加深印象,让学生在比较中逐步掌握。

4、教师将本部分的单词卡片混在一起,快速展示给学生,学生读,然后同桌开火车进行问答操练。

5、“猜一猜“游戏

教师出示第一单元A Let's learn部分的单词卡片,任意抽出一张,问:“How does your aunt/grandmother/grandfather/teacher go to work?”学生猜:“He goes to work on foot/by subway/„”教师给猜对的小组加分。

6、教师放B Let's learn部分的录音,学生跟读。

7、学生看板书提示根据实际情况进行问答操练。

Let's practice.1、学生四人一组讨论用英语描述Bill的一天,并轮流用英语表达。

2、每个小组派代表上台介绍。

3、“考考你的记忆力”游戏

教师介绍某人的一天,然后请学生复述.

Let's chant

1、教师放第44页上歌谣的录音,学生跟录音说唱。

2、学生分组说唱歌谣。

Story time

,教师向学生展示Story time部分的挂图,指着图中的人物问:“What are they doing? What does Joe see? Does Joe like the monkey?”然后教师放该部分的录音,学生听录音跟读、分角色朗读。如果时间允许,教师指导学生进行对话表演。

四、巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)

1、学生做本单元B Let's learn部分的配套练习。

2、“吉姆的故事”游戏:

学生五人一组。第一名学生说:”Jim lives in the country.“第二名学生说”Jim lives in the country.He lives on a farm.“第三名学生说:”Jim lives in the country.He lives on a farm.He goes to work by car.“依次进行,每人在前面学生的基础上再加一句话。同桌之问也可以进行该游戏。

五、Homework

1、学生背诵并抄写本课四会单词。

2、预习Let's talk部分。

教学后记:

第五课时 教学目标:

能够听、说、读、写句型:Does she teach English? No,she doesn't.Yes.she does.

教学重,难点:

1、教学重点是四会掌握句型:Does she teach English? No,she doesn't.Yes,she does.

2、教学难点是在实际情景中正确运用所学对话。课前准备:

1、教师准备录音机及录音带。

2、教师准备B Let's learn的单词卡片和B Let's talk的课件。

3、教师准备卡片若干,正面写有人名,反面写有地名。教学步骤:

一、热身(Warm-up)

1、教师放歌曲”My Pen Pal“的录音,学生跟录音齐唱。

2、学生开火车介绍自己同桌的业余爱好,如:”„likes„其同桌说:No,I like„.“

3、教师放Let's chant部分的歌谣”Tell me about your pen pal''的录音,录音说唱歌谣。

二、预习(Preview)

教师出示B Let's learn部分的单词卡片,问:“Does your uncle live in„?Does he go to work by„?Does he read newspapers in the morning/evening? Does he watch at night?”学生根据实际情况作出肯定或否定面答。

三、新课呈现(Presentation)

Main Scene

教师引导学生看课件,教师说:“Look!Chert Jie is looking at some picture.Her mother is beside her.What are they talking about?”学生分角色朗读。教师可让学生试着用英语描述陈杰的笔友的情况。以下内容供参考:

He is from Canada.He lives in the city.He goes to school by bus.

Let's try

He tikes making planes.He likes swimming.学生听录音,做Let's try部分的练习Listen and circle.Let's talk

1、教师说:“Zhang Peng's mother is a teacher.What does she teach? Does she teach English?”教师出示Let's talk部分的课件,放录音,学生听录音阅读对话。教师出示主句型:Does he/she„?Yes,he/she does.No,he/she doesn't.然后教师引导学生回答刚刚提出的问题,逐步掌握肯定和否定回答。再放一遍, 学生跟读.2、教师说:“My mother is a teacher,too.Do you want to know more about her.Ask me some questions.“教师依次出示B Let's learn部分的单词卡片,提示学生根据上面的短语和黑板上的重点句型提问,教师作答。

3、教师指导学生进行替换练习。必要时,提示学生可以换一下对话里的人物,如:Does your uncle live in the city? Yes,he does.Does your grandma live in the country? No,she doesn't.

4、“寻找家园”游戏

教师准备一些卡片,正面写有人名,反面写有地名,如:city,country,village,farm,forest,mountain,nature park等。请一名学生上台抽取一张卡片,问台一学生:”Guess.Where does„live?''学生猜:“Does he/she live in/on„?”猜对的小组得一分。

5、教师指导学生书写四会句子。

Tick and say

学生听录音,然后完成书上的表格。

1、教师发给学生每人一张表格,表格内容见学生用书第52页。学生将个人信息填好后交给教师。教师请一名学生上台从一摞表格中抽取一张,告诉台下学生:“It's a boy/girl.”学生分成两大组,轮流提问,如:“Does he/she like drawing pictures? Does he/she goes to school by bus?”等等,看哪一组先猜出填写卡片的人是谁。

2、复习Pronunciation,Good to know和Story time的内容。

四、巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)

学生读Let's learn,Let's talk部分,读给同伴听。

五、Homework

1、让学生背诵并抄写B Let's talk1+1。

2、学生做本单元B Let's talk部分的配套练习。

教学后记:

第六课时 教学目标:

1、能够听、说、认读句子:They are very different.

2、能够完成Let's check部分的练习。教学重、难点:

本课时教学重点和难点是理解Let's read中的短文。课前准备:

1、教师准备录音机及录音带。

2、教师准备A、B部分Let's learn的单词卡片和B Let's read的课件。教学步骤:

一、热身(Warm-up)

1、师放第二单元Let's sing部分歌曲“Where Are You Going?”,学生一起拍手唱。

2、师放Let's chant部分的歌“Tell me about your pen pal”,学生跟录音有节奏地说唱。

二、预习(Review)

1、听录音跟读A、B部分Let's learn,Let's talk和A Let's read的内容。

2、师出示A、B部分Let's learn的单词卡片,学生就单词卡片进行问答练习,如:What is your hobby? Does your uncle live in Beijing?等等。

3、“单词”游戏

学生分成若干小组。教师报一个四会单词,如:stamp,各小组第一排的学生争取第一个起立拼出该单词,首先正确拼出单词的为本组赢得一分。

4、生交流汇报Task time的完成情况,如:“„is a„He/She goes to work at„He/She goes to work by„He/She lives in„He/She„in the evening”。

三、呈现(Presentation)

Let's read

1、师说:“Do you remember Alice and her twin sister? They look the same”,后教师指着班上的两名学生问:“Do they look the same?”引导学生给出否定回答。教师给出完整回答:“No,they don't.They look different.”教师板书different,带读。教师接着问:“Do they have the same hobbies?”引导学生说出否定回答:“No,they don't.”教师说:“They're very different.”教师向学生展示本部分的课件,指图中的孪生姐妹对学生说:“This is Alice.This is her twin sister.They look the same,but do they like the same things? Do they go to school together? Let's read.”教师放本部分的录音,让学生打开课本,带着问题阅读。

2、师指导学生完成Write the questions and the answers的练习。

3、师放Let's read部分的录音,学生听录音跟读。

4、四人小组读短文,然后请两、三个小组朗读短文。

Let's play

1、请一名学生上台,他心中想好某一个同学的名字,台下学生通过提问猜

这名学生是谁,如:“Does he go to schoo1 by bus? Does he like playing football/„?”也可进行男女生比赛,看哪一队用最少的does引导的问句猜出这名学生的名字。

2、四人小组做游戏。

Let's check

1、师指导学生完成Let's check部分的练习Listen and write the answers。

2、“记者招待会”活动

请一名学生上台扮演一位名人举行一次记者招待会,其他学生扮演记者。记者分别向“名人”提问,如:Where do you live? What does your mother do? What does your father do? What is your hobby? Do you have a pen pal? Where does he five?等等,扮演名人的学生尽量给出合情合理的回答。

四、巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)

1、学生背诵并书写本单元四会单词和句子。

2、学生读B Let's read部分,读给同伴听。

五、Homework

1、让学生背诵并抄写B Let's read部分。

2、学生做本单元的配套练习。

教学后记:

Unit 5

What Does She Do? 第一课时 教学目标:

1、能够听、说、读、写本课单词:singer,writer,actress,actor,artist,TV reporter。

2、能够理解、认读句子:What does your father/mother do? He's/She's a„。

3、能够听懂、会唱歌曲“My Family”。

教学重、难点:

1、重点是掌握A Let's learn部分的五种职业的英文表达,并能简单问答、介绍,表达自己的理想。

2、难点是在正确区分运用冠词an和a,如:an actress,a writer。课前准备:

1、教师准备本课的录音带。

2、师准备本课单词卡片、四年级上册B Let's learn部分的单词卡片she,he,it等代词卡片、一些名人的图片课件。

3、学生准备本课单词卡片。教学步骤:

一、热身(Warm-up)

教师放歌谣,学生边说边根据内容做一些动作。

二、预习(Preview)

“指手画脚”活动

教师把doctor,teacher,nurse,driver,farmer,baseball player等单词卡片面朝下放在桌上。一名学生抽一张卡片,用动作表演卡片上的职业,其他学生猜职名称。第一个猜出的学生抽下一张卡片继续做游戏。

三、新课呈现(Presentation)

Let's start

教师展示本部分的课件,然后对学生说:“I am a teacher.I teach lessons.”教师板书:teach,teacher。注意:teach和teacher用不同颜色的笔标出来。请学生观察两个词并说出差别。教师通过一些动作给学生以提示,帮助学生理解几种职业的含义。注意提示学生dancer,driver,writer三个词是直接在原动词后面加r。

Let's learn

1、教师出示singer图片,示范朗读,让学生跟说并做动作。

2、教师出示一名歌手的照片,问:“What does she/he do?”引导学生回答:“She/He is a singer.”启发学生说出更多歌手的名字。

3、用同样的方法学习其他职业:writer,TV reporter。教师依次拿出几张演员的图片,问学生:“What does he do?”引导学生回答:“He's an actor.”然后教师再依次出示几张女演员的照片,问:“What does she do?”引导学生回答:“She is an actress.”教师提示学生在actress和actor前面要用an。

4、“快看快拼”活动

教师快速出示一张本部分的单词卡片,学生争取首先说出单词。

5、教师指导学生在学生卡片背面边拼读边描红。

6、“快看快说”活动

教师同时决速出示一张职业图片和she,he,Sarah中的任一张卡片,学生根据卡片上的内容快速说出一个句子,如:She is an actress.

7、教师向学生展示杂志上的名人照片,问:“Who's he/she? What does he/she do?”引导学生回答:“That's„He's/She's a„”

8、“对卡片、说句子”活动

学生把本课职业单词卡片正面朝上放在课桌上,随意抽取一张。教师也从自己的卡片中抽取一张,然后和学生同时说:“What does she do?”教师迅速向学生展示自己的卡片,和教师选同一张卡片的学生起立根据卡片内容回答:“She's a„”

四、巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)

Group work

1、教师依次戴上Amy,Chen Jie等人物的头饰,并介绍说:“I am Amy.I am going to be an artist.I am John.Iam going to be a/an„”然后向一名学生提问:“What are you going to be?”引导学生回答:“I'm going to be a/an„”

2、学生翻开课本第58页,在表格第一列填入要采访的同学名字,然后在教室里走动调查,完成表格,找出最受全班学生欢迎的职业。

3、Let's sing

五、Homework

1、学生抄写Let's learn部分单词。

2、学生做A Let's learn部分的配套练习。

教学后记:

第二课时

教学目标:

'

1、能够听懂、会说本课对话,并能做替换练习。

_

2、能够听、说、读、写句型“What does your mother do? She is a dancer.”并能在情景中运用。

3、了解元音/u:/,/u/和辅音/w/,/j/,/h/,/u/,/d3/的发音并读出例词。教学重、难点:

1、重点是掌握句型:What does„do? She/He is a/an„

2、难点是重点句型中问句的表达。课前准备:

1、教师准备本单元A部分单词卡片。

2、学生每人准备和教师相同的三套卡片和第四、五单元的音标卡片。教学步骤:

一、热身(Warm-up)

1、教师放C部分歌曲“My Family”的录音,学生跟唱。

2、“说出来,接力赛!“活动

全班学生分成几列站好。教师从本单元A Let's learn部分的卡片中随意抽取一张,每队的第一名学生A读出卡片上的单词并做出简单陈述,如:Writer,My father is a writer.然后站到队尾,如果不能正确表述则被罚下出局。教师再抽取一张卡片,每队的第二名学生说句子,依此类推。

二、预习(Preview)

Let's try

学生打开学生用书第59页,教师放录音,学生听音、选择。

三、新课呈现(Presentation)

Let's talk

1、“排列卡片”活动

学生两人一组将A Let's learn部分的单词卡片正面朝上放在桌上。教师打乱顺序读卡片上的单词,学生按教师读的顺序摆放卡片并读出卡片上的单词。然后,教师可以用句子描述卡片上的职业,如:I teach lessons.学生说出职业名称后排列卡片。

2、教师说:”My mother is a teacher.What does your mother do?请几名学生用“She is a(„).”来回答。教师继续说:“My father is a farmer.What does your father do?”引导学生作答。教师板书并示范朗读句型:“What does your mother do?She is a TV reporter.”学生跟读、口拼句型。

3、教师放课文录音,学生跟读。学生两人一组做对话替换练习。

4、教师指导学生书写四会句子或完成活动手册上的书写练习。

Pronunciation

1、教师向学生展示该部分的课件,示范朗读音标/u:/,/u/,/w/,/j/,/h/,/tf/,/d3/,学生跟读。示范发/tf/,/d3/,学生跟读并摸摸自己的喉咙以感觉浊音的/d3/和清音的/tf/的区别。

2、教师引导学生通过拼读音标,尝试读出表格中的例词。然后教师放该部分的录音,学生跟读。鼓励学生说出更多含有本课音标的单词。教师指导学生完

成Read and match的活动。

四、巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)

Group work

1、学生在59页表格第一列的第2~4格中填人要采访的同学名字,(如不够用可写在空白处),然后去采访班里同学:“What does your mother/father do?”如果时间允许,可以让几名学生汇报调查结果。

2、“语音乒乓”活动

学生两人一组,每组学生轮流说出一个音标及含有该音标的单词,如:

学生A:|w|

学生B:wood

五、Homework

1、学生背诵并抄写A Let's talk部分。

2、学生做Let's talk部分的配套练习。

教学后记:

第三课时 教学目标:

1、能够听、说、认读Let's read部分的对话,完成相应的活动。

2、能够运用所学语言完成Let's find out活动。教学重、难点:

1、重点是巩固句型:What does„do? He/She is a/an„

2、难点是理解、认读句型“How exciting!”和“How does she go to Hong Kong? She goes to Hong Kong by plane.,其中,第二个句型是为B部分内容的铺垫,建议课上适当操练。课前准备:

1、教师准备本单元A部分的单词卡片。

2、教师准备一个大的空盒子和一位朋友的图片和资料词卡。

3、学生准备一些名人的图片课件。教学步骤:

一、热身(Warm-up)”炸弹“活动

复习A Let's learn部分的职业词汇和Pronunciation部分的例词及含有该部分的词汇。

二、预习(Preview)

1、将全班分成两大组。教师从A Let's learn部分的单词卡片中任意抽取一张,举起来,两大组根据卡片内容做问答练习:What does he/she do? He's/She's a„

2、教师出示有关职业和家庭成员的单词卡片,请两名自愿上台表演的学生仿 A Let's talk部分内容做对话表演。

三、新课呈现(Presentation)

Let`s read

1、教师发给每名学生一张纸条,让学生在纸条上写下自己的名字、外貌特征将来想从事的职业。然后四名学生一组进行投掷比赛,如果谁能把纸团扔进前面的大盒子里,就可以大声说:”I'm going to be a/an(profession).“如果纸团没有扔进盒子里,就没有机会大声说出自己将来想从事的职业。学生投掷进行得热

烈的时候,教师大声说:”How exciting!“然后在黑板上板书How exciting!教师适时说几次”How exciting!“然后带读:”Exciting!game is exciting.How exciting!“学生跟说。

2、猜一猜

教师从刚才游戏中使用的大纸盒里随意拿出一个纸团,把纸条上所写的人的特征和所向往的职业告诉学生,并提问:”Who's he/she?''请学生猜一猜:写这张纸条的学生是谁。

3、教师课前准备一个朋友的照片或简笔画,把该人物的相关信息分别写在纸上附在相应的照片后面,然后向学生介绍:“This is my friend.教师鼓励学生提问,如:What does she/he like? What does she/he do? Where does she/he work? How does she/he go to work?教师回答,如:She/He works.„She/He goes to work by„

4、学生分小组或同桌之间进行问答练习.

5、教师说:”Wu Yifan has an aunt and an uncle.Do you know anything about them?“学生回答。教师说:”OK.Now open your books and read the dialogue

6、教师向学生展示A Let's read部分的课件,指着照片上的两个人物问:“What does she/he do?”

7、教师放本部分录音,学生打开学生用书阅读短文,然后教师解答疑难点。注意:本部分的最后两个句子:How does she go to Hong Kong? She goes to Hong Kong by plane.是B Let's talk的主要句型。

8、教师指导学生完成Answer the questions的活动。

9、再放一遍录音,核对答案。

四、巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)

1、“嘟嘟”活动。

教师读课文的对话,用beep替换句中的一个词,然后让学生说出被替换的词并试着说出完整的句子。学生熟悉规则后,可以让程度较好的学生担任教师角色读句子。

2、“找一找,说句子”活动

同桌学生使用一本学生用书,翻开B Let's read部分。教师读其中的一句,学生争取首先用手指点出这句话,并大声读出来。

3、教师放第57页上的歌谣录音,学生跟说。

五、Homework

1、学生背诵并抄写A Let's read部分。

2、学生做练习册A Let's read部分的配套练习

教学后记:

第四课时 教学目标:

1、能够听、说、读、写单词:engineer,accountant,policeman,salesperson,cleaner

2、能够听、说、认读“How does he go to work? He goes to work by bike.并能在情景中运用。

3、了解Good to know部分的内容。教学重、难点:

1、重点是掌握Let's learn部分的五个职业名称,并能简单问答、介绍。

2、难点是熟练掌握单词:engineer,accountant,policeman,salesperson。课前准备:

1、教师准备A、B Let's learn部分的单词卡片和课件。

2、教师准备描述职业的词条。

3、学生准备A、B Let's learn部分的单词卡片。教学步骤:

一、热身(Warm-up)

1、教师放第57页上的歌谣录音,学生跟说。

2、教师放歌曲”My Family”的录音,学生跟唱。

二、预习(Preview)

“快闪”活动

教师从A Let's learn部分的单词卡片里任意抽取一张,快速展示给学生后放下,学生根据卡片上的内容说一句话。

三、新课呈现(Presentation)

Let“s learn

1、教师举起engineer的卡片,说:”Look at this man.What does he do?“引导学生回答后带读,学生跟读。让学生说说他们知道的工程师的名字,如:”My uncle is an engineer.“

2、用类似的方法学习其它词:accountant,policeman,salesperson,cleaner。

3、”排列卡片“活动

学生把本部分的五张卡片面朝上放在自己的桌上。教师打乱顺序读出其中几张卡片的单词,学生根据教师读的顺序排好卡片,然后大声读出卡片上的单词。

4、”选一选“活动

教师把五张单词卡片贴在黑板上,问:”What are you going to be?“引导学生回答。

5、教师把bike的卡片贴在engineer的下面,并介绍说:”He goes to work by

bike.“学生跟读。然后教师依次在accountant,policeman,salesperson和cleaner的卡片下面贴上交通工具的卡片,如:subway,bus,car,motor cycle等。教师问:”How does he/she go to work?“引导学生回答:”He/She goes to work by„“接着教师问学生:”How does your mother/father go to work?“并根据回答在相应的交通工具下打钩,调查一下哪种交通方式使用得最普遍。

6、教师指导学生边拼读边在学生卡片的背面描红。

Let's find out

1、学生打开学生用书第6l页,教师指导学生完成Let's find out部分的练习。

2、”指手划脚“活动

教师说本部分的一个句子,如:”He sells things.“学生用动作表现对应的职业。

四、巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)

”我比划,你来猜“活动

请五六名学生到教室前,第一名学生背对黑板,其他则面朝黑板站好。教师给第一名学生A看一张职业单词卡片或描述职业的词条,学生A猜一猜职业名称,然后用动作表演该职业,第二名学生B根据学生A的动作猜职业名称并根据自己的理解表演动作,以此类推,最后一名学生根据前面学生的动作说出职业

名称。

2、Good to know

教师出示一张男警察的图片说:”A policeman.“然后教师再出示一张女警察的图片并问:”Is she a policeman?“引导学生回答:”No,she isn't.She is

policewoman.“同法介绍其它职业的不同表达法。

五、Homework

1、学生背诵并抄写B Let's learn部分单词。

2、做练习册B Let's learn部分的配套练习。

教学后记:

第五课时 教学目标:

1、能够听懂、会说本课对话,并能在情境中运用。

2、能够听、说、读、写句型”Where does she work? How does she go to work?“并在情景中运用。

3、能够理解Story time的故事内容。教学重、难点:

1、重点是掌握句型:Where does she work? How does she go to work?

2、难点是正确使用本单元重点句型。

3、建议教师为学生提供部分工作场所名词,句型教学可参考第一单元内容。课前准备:

1、教师准备A、B Let's learn部分的单词卡片、家庭成员卡片和一些交通方式的卡片。

2、教师准备Story time部分的课件。教学步骤:

一、热身(Warm-up)

”少了什么?“活动

教师把A、B Let's learn部分的职业卡片和家庭成员卡片贴在黑板上,学生观看记忆两分钟后闭上眼睛,教师快速拿掉其中一张卡片,然后学生睁开眼睛找出拿下的是哪张卡片,第一个找出来并正确读出单词的学生可以得到这张卡片。

二、预习(Preview)

1、教师放第一单元歌曲”How Do You Go to School?''的录音,学生跟唱。在热身活动中得到卡片的学生开始把卡片传给后面的同学,依次传递,歌曲结束时,得到卡片的学生用卡片上的单词说一个句子,如:„is a„

2、Let's try

学生打开学生用书第62页,教师放录音,学生听音、勾出正确的选项。

三、新课呈现(Presentation)

Let's talk

1、教师说:“I go to school by subway.”在黑板上板书:subway,学生跟说,然后教师启发学生说出其它的交通方式,教师把学生想到的交通方式依次写在subway的下面。教师说:“1 work in a schoo1.”然后把school写在黑板上,启发学生说说不同的工作场所名称,如:post office,hospital,computer/shoe/car/„company等。

2、“贴卡片”活动

教师说句子,如:My mother works in a car company.She's an accountant.She

goes to work by bus.持有mother,bus和accountant卡片的学生快速跑到黑板前把卡片贴在Car company的旁边。

3、教师就黑板上的内容和学生做对话练习,如:What does your mother do?Where does she work?How does she go to work?教师板书“Where does she work?”和“How does she go to work?”,示范朗读,学生跟说。学生两人一组根据黑板上的语言提示做对话练习。

4、“看卡片,说句子”活动

5、教师放本部分的录音,学生跟读。学生两人一组读课文对话。

6、学生两人一组做对话替换练习。

7、教师指导学生书写四会句子。

四、巩固和延伸(Consolidation and ex tension)

Group work

学生在教室里走动并采访几名同学,如:Where does your father work? How does he go to work?并记录在自制的表格内。调查结束后,请几名学生汇报调查结果,如:Sarah's father works in a schoo1.He goes to work by subway

Let's check

做C部分Let's check练习,学生听音打勾。

Story time

教师向全班学生展示本部分的课件,根据故事的内容提几个问题,带问题听录音阅读故事。

五、Homework

1、学生背诵并抄写B Let's talk部分。

2、学生做B Let's talk部分的配套练习。

教学后记:

第六课时 教学目标:

1、能够听、说、认读Let's read部分的短文,完成相应的活动。

2、能够运用所学语言较好完成Task Time部分的活动。教学重、难点:

1、重点是操练巩固本单元11个职业名称和重点句型:What does he/she do?Where does he/she work? How does he/she go to work?

2、难点是帮助学生理解短文中的新语言,如:help the bank use their money likes helping people,help tourists find their way。

3、教师课前让学生预习Task Time部分的内容,必要时做些记录。课前准备:

1、教师准备A、B Let's learn部分的单词卡片。

2、教师准备一个计时表、Main scene部分的课件和B Let's read部分的教学课件。

3、教师准备长卡片,上面写有职业选择建议,如:If you like drawing,you can be engineer. 教学步骤:

一、热身(Warm-up)

1、“翻卡”活动

学生两人一组,将A、B Let's learn部分的单词卡片面朝上放在自己的课桌上,教师打乱顺序说卡片上的词或说一句与卡片内容相关的句子,学生争取第1个把相关的卡片翻过去。

2、“10秒钟最佳者”活动

教师把A、B Let's learn部分的单词卡片贴在黑板上,学生三人一组,其中,学生A是命名者,学生B是学生,c是裁判员。教师说:“Go!”学生A在十秒钟内说职业名称。时间到,教师说:“Stop!”各组的学生B和学生c报告本组的学生A说对了多少单词,看谁说的单词最多。每组学生交换角色继续做活动。

二、预习(Preview)

教师展示Main scene部分的课件,学生看图并回答教师的问题,如:Who is that man? What does the man do? Where does he work? How does zip go to school?然后教师提供给学生一些头饰、道具等,让学生自编对话表演。

三、新课呈现(Presentation)

Let“s read

1、教师问:”What are you going to be?“学生回答。教师问:''What's your hobby?

学生回答。教师继续问:”What subject do you like best?''学生回答。教师根据学生的回答向学生出示相关的择业建议,如:If you like math,you can be an accountant.“教师说:”I have some more tips here.“然后把剩余的字条全翻贴在黑板上。

2、教师说:”Would you like to know three new friends? They have different

hobbies and they have different jobs.Please open your books and read the passage

3、教师出示本部分的课件,指着第一幅图问:“Who's this woman? What is her

hobby? What does she do? Where does she work? How does she go to work?”让学生带着问题阅读,读后回答问题。

4、同法学习后面两段的内容。教师解释难点,如:“He helps the bank use their

money well.She often helps tourists find their way.”等。建议教师适时告诉学生,要丰富自己的业余生活,培养广泛的兴趣爱好。

5、教师放本部分录音,学生跟读。

6、教师指导学生完成Answer the questions.的活动。

7、“嘟嘟声”活动

教师快速读课文,故意用beep替换句子中的一个单词,学生听后说出被替换掉的单词并试着说出整个句子。

四、巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)

_

Task time

1、教师指导学生根据语言提示完成My parents中的表格,让学生两人一组,学生A问学生B表格中的问题,学生B根据自己填写的内容回答,学生A将内容记录在My partner's parents的表格里。然后两人互换角色,学生B提问,学生A回答,最后两人比较表格所填写内容是否一致。

2、你问我答

学生五至六人一组围坐成一圈,学生A站在圈中心,其他学生询问其家庭成员的工作情况,如:What does your uncle do? How does he go to work? What does he work?等。然后由学生B站到圈中心,其他学生提问。

3、“同号争魁”活动

学生四至六人一组,依次编号。教师报一个号码和一个职业名称,各小组有

此号码的学生到黑板前写出单词,第一个正确写出单词的学生可为本队得一分。

五、Homework

1、让学生背诵并抄写B Let's read部分。

2、学生做B Let's read部分的配套练习。

教学后记:

Unit 6

The Story of Rain 第一课时 教学目标:

1、能够听、说、读、写A Let's learn部分的黑体单词:stream,rain,cloud,sun听、说、认读白体单词:vapour。

2、能够听、说、认读白体句子:Where does the rain come from?

3、能够完成Let's find out的任务。

4、学唱歌曲“Little Water Drop”。

5、了解水结成冰的相关知识。教学重、难点:

重点和难点是Let's learn部分的四会单词:stream,rain,cloud,sun和三会单词vapour。教师要启发学生开动脑筋巧记单词,并结合所给句型替换关键词,在情景中学习新单词,逐步达到掌握要求。课前准备:

1、教师准备A Let's learn部分的课件和单词卡片,准备四年级下册第四单元B Let's learn部分rainy的单词卡片。

2、教师准备实物投影仪、录音机及录音带。

3、教师准备一大张空白画纸,一个小玩具。

4、教师准备四年级下册第四单元B部分的歌谣录音带。

5、学生准备A Let's learn部分的单词卡片。教学步骤:

一、热身(Warm-up)

教师放四年级下册第四单元B部分的歌谣录音,学生跟说歌谣并做出相应的动作。

二、预习(Preview)教师说:“We drink water every day.We need water every day.What else needs water?”教师出示Let's start部分的课件,引导学生看图回答:Trees/Flower/Animals/Birds need warm.Fish needs water,too.教师可以启发学生,想出更多动植物、昆虫名称,然后继续问:"Where does water come from?'引导学生回答:

下载湘教版六年级上册英语教案(完整版)(五篇模版)word格式文档
下载湘教版六年级上册英语教案(完整版)(五篇模版).doc
将本文档下载到自己电脑,方便修改和收藏,请勿使用迅雷等下载。
点此处下载文档

文档为doc格式


声明:本文内容由互联网用户自发贡献自行上传,本网站不拥有所有权,未作人工编辑处理,也不承担相关法律责任。如果您发现有涉嫌版权的内容,欢迎发送邮件至:645879355@qq.com 进行举报,并提供相关证据,工作人员会在5个工作日内联系你,一经查实,本站将立刻删除涉嫌侵权内容。

相关范文推荐

    六年级上册英语教案

    广东版开心英语六年级(上)全册教案 Unit1 I wrote a long letter. 一 教学目标 1. 学会VOCABULARY 的单词。 2. 复习巩固上学期学习的句型:―Did you…‖ 、“Yes, I did./No......

    新冀教版六年级上册英语教案

    Lesson 1 At the Airport 一、教学目标 (一)知识目标 1.学生能听懂会读本课课文 2.使学生通过练习复习句子:What time is it? It’s ____.复习所学过的时间表达法。 (二)能力目......

    湘教版六年级上册英语教案

    Unit 1 What did you do during the holidays? (你在假期里做了什么?) 学情分析: 学生已掌握一定数量的动词和动词的现在分词,现在要学习过去式,并要将它们联系起来有一些困难。再......

    湘教版六年级上册英语教案[范文大全]

    Unit 1 What did you do during the holidays? (你在假期里做了什么?) 学情分析: 学生已掌握一定数量的动词和动词的现在分词,现在要学习过去式,并要将它们联系起来有一些困难。再......

    原版 湘少版四年级上册英语教案

    Unit one Nice to meet you!Period 1 Teaching targets. 1. The target of knowledge: 1) Learn these new words: slide, bench, bark, chain, swing 2) Learn these sentenc......

    2017-2018学年度湘少版四年级上册英语教案

    Unit 1 Nice to meet you . 教学目 标 1 能听懂、会说新单词 nice,are ,thanks ,brother ,sister; 2 能听懂、会说本课对话; 3 能灵活运用Good morning , How are you ? Glad......

    福建教育出版社 六年级上册英语教案

    集 备 原 稿 Unit 1 The Olympic Games Unit 1The Olympic Games文化和语言注释 1.本单元的话题是奥林匹克运动会(简称奥运会)。A部分主要谈论奥运会的一般情况,时态以一般现在......

    新人教版六年级上册英语教案

    低年级识字教学 中国的文化博大渊源,中国的文字更是中国文化的体现,每个汉字的背后都有一个故事或者一个典故。《语文课程标准》明确指出:识字写字是阅读和写作的基础,是1—2年......